08:00 and the Period 1 Occupied To point to 17:00. To create a different weekend schedule, the user would use Period 2 and set days Saturday and Sunday to ...
48/50PD05,06 Single Package Displacement Ventilation or Single Zone Variable Airflow Rooftop Units Electric Cooling/Gas Heating with PURONR (R- 410A) Refrigerant and COMFORTLinkt 2.x Controls Controls, Start--Up, Operation, Service and Troubleshooting Instructions TABLE OF CONTENTS Page SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 BASIC CONTROL USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ComfortLinkt Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Scrolling Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessory Navigator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 System Pilott and Touch Pilot Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CCN Tables and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 START--UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Unit Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Compressor Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Refrigerant Service Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Crankcase Heater(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Compressor Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Internal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Evaporator Fan Set--Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Condenser Fans and Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Return--Air Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Outdoor--Air Inlet Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Accessory Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Orifice Change (48PD Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Gas Heat (48PD Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 CONTROLS QUICK SET--UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Control Set Point and Configuration Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Standard Unit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 CCN Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Programming Operating Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SERVICE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Independent Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Fan Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Cooling Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Heating Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 THIRD PARTY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Remote Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Fire Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Economizer Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Economizer Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 CONTROLS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Setpoint Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Occupancy Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Indoor Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cooling Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Heating Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Integrated Gas Controller (IGC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Economizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Temperature Compensated Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)R Configuration . . . . . . . . . 24 Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Alarm Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Copyright 2009 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231 Printed in U.S.A. Edition Date: 6/09 Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations. Catalog No:48- 50PD- 02T Replaces: 48--50PD--01T 48/50PD TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Complete Unit Stoppage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Restart Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Communication Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Cooling Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 32 Economizer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Heating Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . 36 Phase Loss Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Thermistor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Transducer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Forcing Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Digital Scroll Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Economizer Control Board (ECB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Modulation Board (AUX1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Digital Scroll Control Board (DSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Low Voltage Terminal Strip (TB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Scrolling Marquee Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Accessory Navigatort Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)R Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Field--Installed Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Evaporator Fan Service and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Evaporator Fan Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Condenser--Fan Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Verify Sensor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Economizer Operation During Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Evacuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Gas Valve Adjustment (48PD Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 High Altitude (48PD Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Main Burners (48PD Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Filter Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Compressor Sound Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Control Circuit, 24--V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 APPENDIX A -- LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 APPENDIX B -- VFD INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 APPENDIX C -- STARTUP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 APPENDIX D -- ADDITIONAL STARTUP DATA . . . . . . . 101 UNIT START--UP CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service air-conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel can perform the basic maintenance functions of replacing filters. Trained service personnel should perform all other operations. When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions in the literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other safety precautions that may apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations. Have fire extinguishers available for all brazing operations. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and National Electrical Code (NEC) for special requirements. Recognize safety information. This is the safety--alert symbol . When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety--alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies a hazard which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation. ! WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury or death. Before performing service or maintenance operations on unit, turn off main power switch to unit and install lockout tag. Ensure electrical service to rooftop unit agrees with voltage and amperage listed on the unit rating plate. ! CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may cause equipment damage. This unit uses a microprocessor--based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out components or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short--to--ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or electrical components. 2 48/50PD ! WARNING FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury, death and/or property damage. Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, or maintenance can cause property damage, personal injury, or loss of life. Refer to the User's Information Manual provided with this unit for more details. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. What to do if you smell gas: 1. DO NOT try to light any appliance. 2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any phone in your building. 3.IMMEDIATELY call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. 4. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. GENERAL This publication contains Start--Up, Controls, Operation, Service, and Troubleshooting information for the 48/50PD rooftop units. (See Table 1.) These units are equipped with ComfortLinkt controls version 1.X or higher and use Puronr refrigerant. The specific base unit installation instructions and/or wiring label diagram may also be required in conjunction with this book as a guide to a specific unit on the roof. All the units in Table 1 are Displacement Ventilation or Single Zone Variable Airflow units that provide stand--alone or network operation. Table 1 Rooftop Units MODEL SIZE NOMINAL TONS 48/50PD 05 4 06 5 BASIC CONTROL USAGE ComfortLink Control The ComfortLink control is a comprehensive unit-management system. The control system is easy to access, configure, diagnose and troubleshoot. The ComfortLink control is fully communicating and cable-ready for connection to the Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) building management system. The control provides high-speed communications for remote monitoring via the Internet. Multiple units can be linked together (and to other ComfortLink control equipped units) using a 3-wire communication bus. The ComfortLink control system is easy to access through the use of a unit-mounted display module. There is no need to bring a separate computer to this unit for start-up. Access to control menus is simplified by the ability to quickly select from 11 menus. A scrolling readout provides detailed explanations of control information. Only four, large, easy-to-use buttons are required to maneuver through the entire controls menu. The display readout is designed to be visible even in bright sunlight. For added service flexibility, an accessory hand-held NavigatorTM module is also available. This portable device has an extended communication cable that can be plugged into the unit's communication network at the main control box. The Navigator display provides the same menu structure, control access and display data as is available at the unit-mounted Scrolling Marquee display. MODE Run Status Service Test Temperature Pressures Setpoints Inputs Alarm Status Outputs Configuration Time Clock ESCAPE Operating Modes Alarms ENTER Fig. 1 -- Scrolling Marquee C06320 Scrolling Marquee This device is the keypad interface used to access the control information, read sensor values, and test the unit. The Scrolling Marquee is located in the main control box and is standard on all units. The Scrolling Marquee display is a 4-key, 4-character, 16-segment LED (light-emitting diode) display module. The display also contains an Alarm Status LED. (See Fig. 1.) The display is easy to operate using 4 buttons and a group of 11 LEDs that indicate the following menu structures: S Run Status S Service Test S Temperatures S Pressures S Set points S Inputs S Outputs S Configuration S Timeclock S Operating Modes S Alarms Through the Scrolling Marquee, the user can access all of the inputs and outputs to check on their values and status, configure operating parameters plus evaluate the current decision status for operating modes. The control also includes an alarm history which can be accessed from the display. In addition, through the Scrolling Marquee, the user can access a built-in test routine that can be used at start-up commissioning and to diagnose operational problems with the unit. Accessory Navigator Display The accessory hand-held Navigator display can be used with the 48/50PD units. (See Fig. 2.) The Navigator display operates the same way as the Scrolling Marquee device. The Navigator display is plugged into the LEN (local equipment network) port on either TB1 or the J3 port on the ECB (economizer control board). 3 48/50PD C o N m AV f I GoArTtOLRi n k SLEETWWITMTPTE 4454144.2.0.1.6°5°F°F8F MODE Run Status PTreeSsmesrpuveircereastTueresst Setpoints Inputs Alarm Status Outputs TCimoenfCigloucraktion Operating Alarms Modes ESC ENTER Fig. 2 -- Accessory Navigator Display C06321 Operation All units are shipped from the factory with the Scrolling Marquee display, which is located in the main control box. (See Fig. 1.) In addition, the ComfortLink control also supports the use of the handheld Navigator display. Both displays provide the user with an interface to the ComfortLink control system. The displays have up and down arrow keys, an ESCAPE key and an ENTER key. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. The Navigator display and the Scrolling Marquee operate in the same manner, except that the Navigator display has multiple lines of display and the Scrolling Marquee has a single line. All further discussions and examples in this document will be based on the Scrolling Marquee display. See Table 2 for the menu structure. The four keys are used to navigate through the display structure, which is organized in a tiered mode structure. If the buttons have not been used for a period, the display will default to the AUTO VIEW display category as shown under the RUN STATUS category. To show the top-level display, press the ESCAPE key until a blank display is shown. Then use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the top-level categories. These are listed in Appendix A and will be indicated on the Scrolling Marquee by the LED next to each mode listed on the face of the display. When a specific mode or sub-mode is located, push the ENTER key to enter the mode. Depending on the mode, there may be additional tiers. Continue to use the up and down keys and the ENTER keys until the desired display item is found. At any time, the user can move back a mode level by pressing the ESCAPE key. Once an item has been selected the display will flash showing the item, followed by the item value and then followed by the item units (if any). Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The display will flash PASS and WORD when required. Use the ENTER and arrow keys to enter the four digits of the password. The default password is 1111. Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously will scroll an expanded text description across the display indicating the full meaning of each display point. Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys when the display is blank (MODE LED level) will return the display to its default menu of rotating AUTO VIEW display items. In addition, the password will need to be entered again before changes can be made. Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. If the display is in rotating auto-view, press the ENTER key to stop the display at the desired item. Press the ENTER key again so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value of state of an item and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press the ESCAPE key and the item, value or units display will resume. Repeat the process as required for other items. There are some points that can be forced from the Scrolling Marquee or the Navigator. If the user needs to force a variable, follow the same process as when editing a configuration parameter. A forced variable, regardless where the force has come from will be displayed with a blinking "." on a Scrolling Marquee and a blinking "f" on a Navigator following its value. For example, if economizer commanded position (EC.CP) is forced, the Navigator display shows "80f", where the "f" is blinking to signify a force on the point. The Scrolling Marquee display shows "80." Where the "." is blinking to signify a force on the point. Remove the force by selecting the point that is forced with the key ENTER and then pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously. Depending on the unit model, factory-installed options and field-installed accessories, some of the items in the various Mode categories may not apply. System Pilott and Touch Pilot Devices The System Pilot device (33PILOT--01) and Touch Pilot device (33CNTPILOT) can be used as CCN communication user--interfaces. These devices can be put on the CCN bus and addressed to communicate with any other device on the network. Unlike the Scrolling Marquee and Navigator, these pilots read the 48/50PD's CCN tables and the units CCN points can be monitored, forced, or configured. IMPORTANT: Multiple zoning application is NOT recommended at this time with the PD products. Additionally, the System Pilot device can serve as a wall--mounted temperature sensor for space temperature measurement. The occupant can use the System Pilot device to change set points. A security feature is provided to limit access of features for unauthorized users. See Fig. 3 for System Pilot device details. CCN Tables and Display In addition to the unit--mounted Scrolling Marquee display, the user can also access the same information through the CCN tables by using the Service tool or other CCN programs/devices. The variable names used for the CCN tables and the Scrolling Marquee menus may be different and more items may be displayed in the CCN tables. Details on the CCN tables are included with the local display menus in Appendix A. Appendix A is structured towards the organization of the local display (Scrolling Marquee) menus. Because of the variety of CCN programs and devices, the CCN tables, sub--tables, and points are referenced within that organization. 4 48/50PD Table 2 Scrolling Marquee Mode and Menu Display Structure RUN STATUS Auto View of Run Status (VIEW) Software Version Numbers (VERS) Control Modes (MODE) Cooling Status (COOL) Heating Status (HEAT) Economizer Status (ECON) Component Run Hours (HRS) Component Starts (STRT) SERVICE TEST Service Test Mode (TEST) Test Independent Outputs (INDP) Test Fans (FANS) Test Cooling (COOL) Test Heating (HEAT) TEMPERATURES Air Temperatures (AIR.T) Refrigerant Temperatures (REF.T) PRESSURES SETPOINTS INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION TIME CLOCK General Inputs (GEN.I) Current Sensor Inputs (CS.IN) Air Quality Inputs (AIR.Q) Fan Outputs (FANS) Cool Outputs (COOL) Heat Outputs (HEAT) Economize r Outputs (ECON) Alarm Relay (ALRM) Display Configuration (DISP) Unit Configuration (UNIT) Cooling Configuration (COOL) Heating Configuration (HEAT) Economizer Configuration (ECON) Air Quality Cfg. (AIR.Q) Alarm Relay Config. (ALM.O) PID Configuration (PID) Sensor Calibration (TRIM) CCN Configuration (CCN) Time of Day (TIME) Month, Date Day and Year (DATE) Daylight Savings Time (DST) Local Time Schedule (SCH.L) Local Holiday Schedules (HOL.L) OPERATIN G MODES Control Modes (MODE) Cool Mode Diagnostic (COOL) Heat Mode Diagnostic (HEAT) Economizer Diagnostic (ECON) Demand Listing (DMD.L) ALARMS Reset All Current Alarms (R.CURR) Reset Alarm History (R.HIST) Currently Active Alarms (CURR) Alarm HIstory (HIST) NAVIGATE/ EXIT MODIFY/ SELECT SCROLL + PAGE - Fig. 3 -- System Pilott User Interface C06322 Force Hierarchy There is a hierarchy in CCN with regards to forcing a point. Programs and devices write a force at different priority levels. A higher level (smaller number, 1 being the highest) will override a lower level force. The Scrolling Marquee uses a Control Force at level 7. The Navigator writes a Service Force which is level 3. System Pilots and Touch Pilots write Supervisor Forces at level 4. Network programs can be set to write different level priority forces. Generic Status Display Table The GENERIC points table allows the service/installer the ability to create a custom table in which up to 20 points from the 5 CCN categories (Points, Config, Service--Config, Set Point, and Maintenance) may be collected and displayed. In the Service--Config table section, there is a table named "GENERICS." This table contains placeholders for up to 20 CCN point names and allows the user to decide which points are displayed in the GENERIC points sub--table under the status display table. Each one of these placeholders allows the input of an 8--character ASCII string. Using a CCN interface, enter the Edit mode for the Service--Config table "GENERICS" and enter the CCN name for each point to be displayed in the custom points table in the order they will be displayed. When done entering point names, download the table to the rooftop unit control. IMPORTANT: The computer system software (ComfortVIEWt, Service Tool, etc.) that is used to interact with CCN controls, always saves a template of items it considers as static (e.g., limits, units, forcibility, 24--character text strings, and point names) after the software uploads the tables from a control. Thereafter, the software is only concerned with run time data like value and hardware/force status. With this in mind, it is important that any time a change is made to the Service--Config table "GENERICS" (which in turn changes the points contained in the GENERIC point table), that a complete new upload be performed. This requires that any previous table database be completely removed first. Failure to do this will not allow the user to display the new points that have been created and the CCN interface will have a different table database than the unit control. 5 48/50PD Conventions Used in This Manual The following conventions for discussing configuration points for the local display (Scrolling Marquee or NavigatorTM accessory) will be used in this manual. Point names will be written with the Mode name first, then any submodes, then the point name, each separated by an arrow symbol (). Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an example, the Fan Status Switch which is located in the Configuration mode, and Unit sub-mode would be written as Configuration UNITFN.SW. This path name will show the user how to navigate through the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the up and down keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing ENTER to move into the next level of the menu structure. When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example, ConfigurationUNITFN.SW = 1 (Normal Open). Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously will scroll an expanded text description of the point name across the display. The expanded description is shown in the local display tables but will not be shown with the path names in text. The CCN point names are also referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the unit with CCN software instead of the local display. See Appendix A of this manual. START-UP IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to start unit, even momentarily, until all items on the Start--Up Checklist (last page) and the following steps have been completed. CONTROL BOX AND COMPRESSOR ELECTRICAL OPTIONS PANEL Unit Preparation Check that unit has been installed in accordance with these installation instructions and all applicable codes. Compressor Mounting Compressors are internally spring mounted. Do not loosen or remove compressor holddown bolts. Refrigerant Service Ports Each independent refrigerant system has a total of 3 Schrader-type service gauge ports per circuit. One port is located on the suction line, one on the compressor discharge line, and one on the liquid line. Be sure that caps on the ports are tight. Crankcase Heater(s) Compressor crankcase heater operation varies depending on the unit size and type. In general for all units, the crankcase heaters are energized if there is power to the unit, the compressor is not operating, and the ambient temperature is below 60_F. IMPORTANT: Unit power must be on for 24 hours prior to start--up. Otherwise, damage to compressor may result. Compressor Rotation ! CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in unit damage. Improper wiring will cause compressor stoppage and alarm. Correct wiring by switching leads as indicated below. INDOOR MOTOR ACCESS DOOR OUTDOOR AIR SCREEN (HIDDEN) CONDENSER COIL ACCESS PANEL BASEPAN CONNECTIONS ACCESS PANEL FILTER ACCESS DOOR Fig. 4 -- Panel and Filter Locations GAS SECTION ACCESS C07002 6 48/50PD On 3-phase units, it is important to be certain the compressors are rotating in the proper direction. To determine whether or not compressors are rotating in the proper direction, use a phase-rotation meter on the unit input power to check for L1-L2-L3 or clockwise rotation or use the Service Test mode to energize a compressor. If the compressor is rotating in the wrong direction, the controls will stop the compressor and display alarm for "Circuit A Failure to Pressurize." IMPORTANT: Indoor or outdoor fan rotation direction may not indicate proper input power phase sequence, as some 3-phase units use single-phase fan motors. To correct the wrong compressor rotation direction, perform the following procedure: 1. Turn off power to the unit and lock out the power. 2. Switch any two of the incoming unit power leads. 3. Turn on power to the unit. 4. Verify corrected compressor rotation. Power Supply All 208/230-v units are factory wired for 230-v power supply. If the 208/230-v unit is to be connected to a 208-v power supply, the transformers (TRAN1 and TRAN2) must be rewired by moving the wire from the 230-volt connection and moving to the 200-volt terminal on the primary side of the transformer. Refer to unit label diagram for additional information. Internal Wiring Check all electrical connections in unit control boxes; tighten as required. Evaporator Fan Set--Up The 48/50PD units are equipped with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). The VFD varies the frequency of the fan motor causing its speed to change. Fan belt and variable pulleys are also factory installed, but may need to be adjusted for specific applications. Check the fan to ensure its rotation is in the proper direction before adjusting performance. See Appendix C for unit specific fan performance data. See Appendix D for unit specific air quality limits, evaporator fan motor specifications, FIOP static pressures, and fan RPM for various motor pulley settings. Appendix C and D are based on 100% fan speed (VFD at 60Hz). To alter fan performance via pulley settings, see Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment in the Service section. The Supply Fan Minimum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MN) and the Supply Fan Maximum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MX) can also be used to alter fan performance. The fan should run at the maximum fan speed when setting up the application design point. The Supply Fan Minimum Speed (FS.MN) can be user configured between 10 and 70%. The Supply Fan Minimum Speed default value is 70%. This provides the greatest energy efficiency rating for a unit without an economizer in a mixed air type duct application. The Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX) can be configured between 80 and 100%. The Supply Fan Maximum Speed default value is 100%. Set the indoor fan pulley to the application design point CFM for heating and cooling at 100% fan speed so that the CFM is not lower than the minimum CFM allowed in the product data. If the exact CFM can not be set by the half turn pulley settings then adjust the Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX) to fine tune the CFM to the application requirements. The VFD's settings should not be used for adjusting fan performance. Specific VFD information can be found in Appendix B. IMPORTANT: The Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX) RPM must not produce a supply CFM that is lower that the minimum CFM allowed in the product data for heating and cooling. During heating mode, the fan speed is always set to Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX). For units with a power exhaust option, the controls require an accurate supply duct CFM at the unit design point where the indoor fan will run at the Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX) for proper operation. The supply duct CFM is configured by the Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (ConfigurationECONIDF.C). Default values for Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (IDF.C) are at 400 CFM per ton or 1600 CFM for the 05 size and 2000 CFM for the 06 size. It is preferred to use the supply duct CFM from an air balance report to configure the Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (IDF.C). If an air balance report is not available, then use the fan tables supplied in this book to determine Fan Max Speed CFM (IDF.C). When using the fan tables to determine Fan Max Speed CFM (IDF.C) set Economizer Position Test (Service TestINDPECON) to 0 (Economizer Damper Closed) and Indoor Fan Speed Test (Service TestFANSF.SPD) equal to Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX). Measure the supply to return duct static pressure difference and indoor fan RPM. Make correction to static pressure for all options installed in the unit per the accessory pressure drop table. Determine Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (IDF.C) on the fan table where the corrected static pressure and RPM cross. Condenser Fans and Motors Condenser fans and motors are factory set. Refer to Condenser-Fan Adjustment section as required. Return--Air Filters Check that correct filters are installed in filter tracks (see Physical Data table in Installation Instructions). Do not operate unit without return-air filters. IMPORTANT: For units with 4-in. filter option, units are shipped with standard 2-in. filters. To install 4-in. filters, the filter spacers must be removed. Outdoor--Air Inlet Screens Outdoor-air inlet screens must be in place before operating unit. Accessory Installation Check to make sure that all accessories including sensors have been installed and wired as required by the instructions and unit wiring diagrams. Orifice Change (48PD Only) This unit is factory assembled for heating operation using natural gas at an elevation from sea level to 2000 ft. Use accessory high altitude kit when installing this unit at an elevation of 2000 to 7000 ft. For elevations above 7000 ft, refer to High Altitude section to identify the correct orifice size for the elevation. Purchase these orifices from your local Carrier dealer. Follow instructions in accessory Installation Instructions to install the correct orifices. Use accessory LP (liquid propane) gas conversion kit when converting this unit for use with LP fuel usage for elevations up to 7000 ft. For elevations above 7000 ft, refer to High Altitude section to identify the correct orifice size for the elevation. Purchase these orifices from your local Carrier dealer. Follow instructions in accessory Installation Instructions to install the correct orifices. 7 48/50PD Gas Heat (48PD Only) Inspect the gas heat section of the unit. Verify the number of burners match the number of heat exchanger openings and the burner assembly is properly aligned. If the orifices were changed out for elevation or Liquid Propane purposes, verify proper installation. Visually inspect other components in heat section. Verify gas pressures before turning on heat as follows: 1. Turn off field-supplied manual gas stop, located external to unit. 2. Connect pressure gauge to supply gas tap, located on field-supplied manual shutoff valve. (See Fig. 5.) 3. Connect pressure gauge to manifold pressure tap. 4. Turn on field-supplied manual gas stop. Enter Service Test mode by setting Service TestTEST to "ON" using the Scrolling Marquee display. Use the Service Test feature to set Service TestHEATHT.1 to ON (first stage of heat) using the Scrolling Marquee. MANUAL SHUT OFF (FIELD SUPPLIED) GAS SUPPLY PRESSURE TAP (1/8 NPT PLUG) TO UNIT UNION SEDIMENT TRAP Fig. 5 -- Field Gas Piping C09242 5. After the unit has run for several minutes, verify the supply gas pressure is between 5.5--in. wg to 13.0--in. wg, and the manifold pressure is 3.50--in. wg on sizes 03--14 and 3.00 on size 16. If manifold pressure must be adjusted, refer to Gas Valve Adjustment section. IMPORTANT: Supply gas pressure must not exceed 13.0--in. wg. 6. Set Service TestHEATHT.1 to OFF using Scrolling Marquee. 7. Exit Service Test mode by setting Service TestTEST to "OFF" using the Scrolling Marquee. CONTROLS QUICK SET--UP The following information will provide a quick guide to setting up and configuring the 48/50PD series units with ComfortLinkTM controls. Unit controls are pre-configured at the factory for factory-installed options. Field-installed accessories will require configuration at start-up. Service Test is recommended for initial start--up. Additionally, specific job requirements may require changes to default configuration values. See the CCN and Display parameter tables and other sections of these instructions for more details. Refer to the Major System Components or accessory installation instructions for specific wiring detail. Control Set Point and Configuration Log During start up, accessory installation, and equipment service set points and/or configuration changes might have to be made. When setting set points or changing configuration settings, documentation is recommended. The Control Log starting on page 106 should be filled out and left with the unit at all times. A copy should also be provided to the equipment owner. Standard Unit Control There are two different applications these units can be applied to, Displacement Ventilation and Single Zone VAV. For either application a direct wired space sensor can be used or a communicating sensor/thermostat can be used. Installation of an accessory supply air temperature (SAT) sensor in the supply duct is recommended when using a communication type control. A supply duct SAT measurement is valid for heating mode display, while the factory--standard internal SAT is not valid for heating due to its location upstream of the heating section. When installing the supply duct SAT, the heating mode display is enabled by setting ConfigurationHEATSATSAT.H to ENBL. There are several configurations that should be considered for Displacement Ventilation or Single Zone VAV applications. Table 3 shows these configuration defaults and specific application settings. These settings are typical values and should be adjusted for each actual specific unit application. Refer to the Operation section for more detail on these configurations and how they effect the units operation. IMPORTANT: Multiple zoning application is not recommended at this time with the PD product. Space Temperature Sensor Control--Direct Wired (T- 55, T- 56, or T- 59) Wire accessory space temperature sensor(s) to the T--55 terminals on the field connection terminal board located at the unit control box. No configuration is required when installing a T--55, T--56, or T--59. Refer to Field-Installed Accessories section for additional information. T- 58 Communicating Room Sensor Install the T--58 communicating thermostat. Connect the CCN communication bus from the T--58 to the CCN terminals on the field connection terminal board located at the unit control box. Configure the unit's CCN communication element number, bus number, and baud rate. Configure the T--58's CCN communication bus number and baud rate the same as the unit, while the element number has to be different. Configure the T--58 to send SPT to the unit's element number. Refer to the Field--Installed Accessories section for additional information. System Pilot - Communication Space Sensor Install the System Pilot and connect the CCN communication bus from it to the units CCN connection on the low voltage terminal board. Configure the unit's CCN communication element number, bus number, and baud rate. Refer to the System Pilot's installation instructions for configuring it to be used as a space temperature and attaching it to a unit. Gen III TEMP Monitor - Linkage Communication Thermostat (33CSTMT- 01) Install the linkage thermostat. Connect the CCN communication bus from the Stat to the CCN terminals on the field connection terminal board located at the unit control box. Configure the unit's CCN communication element number, bus number, and baud rate. Refer to the Linkage Thermostat's installation instructions for configuring the Stat and additional information about it. Space Humidistat Control The humidistat input is provided on the field connection terminal board. The Space Humidity Switch configuration, ConfigurationUNITRH.SW, identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input at LOW humidity. TB1--R terminal is the 24VAC source for the dry contact and TB1--W2 terminal is the signal input. 8 48/50PD Table 3 Application Specific Configurations ITEM EXPANSION DEFAULT SASP FS.MX FS.MN FS.VM MIN.C FS.CD SA.MU SA.MD MP.MX PE1.C IDF.C Cool Supply Air Setpoint Supply Fan Maximum Speed Supply Fan Minimum Speed Vent Mode Fan Speed Min Compressor Capacity Fan Speed Control Demand SASP Maximum Reset Up SASP Maximum Reset Down Econ Min at Max Fanspeed Power Exhaust Stage 1 CFM Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM 65 100 70 50 70 3 10 --- 10 30 600 1600 (05) 2000 (06) Relative Humidity Sensor Control For units with the economizer option (with the ECB--economizer control board), the humidity sensor input is provided on the field connection terminal board. The sensor can be used in addition to or instead of a humidistat. The RH Sensor on OAQ Input configuration, ConfigurationUNITRH.S=YES, identifies that the sensor is being used instead of an OAQ sensor. Terminal 1 is the 24vdc loop power and Terminal 4 is the 4--20 mA signal input. Refer to the Field Installed Accessories for more information. CCN Communication Configure ConfigurationCCNCCN.A to desired element number (Default is 1). Configure ConfigurationCCN CCN.B to desired bus number (Default is 0). Configure ConfigurationCCNBAUD to desired code number for baud rate (Default is 3 = 9600 baud). Accessories Below are quick configuration settings for field installed accessories. If these accessories were installed by the factory, they will already be configured. See the Field--Installed Accessories section, third party control, control connection tables, and CCN or Display parameter tables for any accessories not mentioned below and any additional information on accessories. Economizer If an Economizer accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationECONEC.EN to YES. The default settings for the other economizer configurations should be satisfactory. If they need to be changed, additional information about these configuration settings can be found in the Economizer section. Power Exhaust If a Power Exhaust accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationECONPE.EN to ENBL. The default settings for the other power exhaust configurations should be satisfactory. If they need to be changed, additional information about these configurations can be found in the Power Exhaust section. UNITS dF % % % % F F F % cfm cfm DISPLACEMENT VENTILATION 65 100 20 50 15 3 3 --- 3 30 600 1600 (05) 2000 (06) SINGLE ZONE VAV 55 100 70 50 70 3 5 --- 5 30 600 1600 (05) 2000 (06) Electric Heat If an Electric Heat accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationHEATHT.TY to a value of 2. The number of electric heat stages must be configured by setting ConfigurationHEATN.HTR per the installed heater. Fire Shutdown If a Fire Shutdown or Smoke Detector accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationUNITFS.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2) when there is not a fire alarm. Normally open (1) is the preferred configuration. IMPORTANT: On standard units, the fire shutdown input is the terminals Fire Shutdown 1 and 2. Outdoor Enthalpy If an Outdoor Enthalpy accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationECONEN.SW, identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input when the outdoor enthalpy is low. IAQ Switch If an IAQ Switch accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationAIR.QII.CF, identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input when the indoor air quality value is low (good) and also selects the unit response to this input. IMPORTANT: An IAQ switch cannot be used if an enthalpy switch is already on this input. IAQ Sensor If an CO2 Sensor accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationAIR.QIA.CF selects the unit response to this input. Default conversion to 0 to 2000 ppm. OAQ Sensor If an Outdoor Air Quality Sensor accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationAIR.Q OA.CF selects the unit response to this input. Default conversion to 0 to 2000 ppm. 9 48/50PD Fan Status If a Fan Status accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationUNITFN.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the preferred configuration. IMPORTANT: Fan Status input is not on the terminals marked Fan Status. Filter Status If a Filter Status accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting ConfigurationUNITFL.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the preferred configuration. Programming Operating Schedules The ComfortLinkt controls will accommodate up to eight different schedules (Periods 1 through 8), and each schedule is assigned to the desired days of the week. Each schedule includes an occupied on and off time. As an example, to set an occupied schedule for 8 AM to 5 PM for Monday through Friday, the user would set days Monday through Friday to ON for Period 1. Then the user would configure the Period 1 Occupied From point to 08:00 and the Period 1 Occupied To point to 17:00. To create a different weekend schedule, the user would use Period 2 and set days Saturday and Sunday to ON with the desired Occupied On and Off times. (See Table 4.) IMPORTANT: By default, the time schedule periods are programmed for 24 hours of occupied operation. To create a schedule, perform the following procedure: 1. Scroll to the Configuration mode, and select CCN CONFIGURATION (CCN). Scroll down to the Schedule Number (ConfigurationCCNSCH.O=SCH.N). If password protection has been enabled, the user will be prompted to enter the password before any new data is accepted. SCH.N has a range of 0 to 99. The default value is 1. A value of 0 is always occupied, and the unit will control to its occupied set points. A value of 1 means the unit will follow a local schedule, and a value of 65 to 99 means it will follow a CCN schedule. Schedules 2--64 are not used as the control only supports one internal/local schedule. If one of the 2--64 schedules is configured, then the control will force the number back to 1. Make sure the value is set to 1 to use a local schedule. 2. Enter the Time Clock mode. Scroll down to the LOCAL TIME SCHEDULE (SCH.L) sub--mode, and press ENTER. Period 1 (PER.1) will be displayed. 3. Scroll down to the MON.1 point. This point indicates if schedule 1 applies to Monday. Use the ENTER command to go into Edit mode, and use the Up or Down key to change the display to YES or NO. Scroll down through the rest of the days and apply schedule 1 where desired. The schedule can also be applied to a holiday. 4. Configure the beginning of the occupied time period for Period 1 (OCC). Press ENTER to go into Edit mode, and the first two digits of the 00.00 will start flashing. Use the Up or Down key to display the correct value for hours, in 24--hour (military) time. Press ENTER and hour value is saved and the minutes digits will start flashing. Use the same procedure to display and save the desired minutes value. 5. Configure the unoccupied time for period 1 (UNC). Press ENTER to go into Edit mode, and the first two digits of the 00.00 will start flashing. Use the Up or Down key to display the correct value for hours, in 24--hour (military) time. Press ENTER and hour value is saved and the minutes digits will start flashing. Use the same procedure to display and save the desired minutes value. 6. The first schedule is now complete. If a second schedule is needed, such as for weekends or holidays, scroll down and repeat the entire procedure for period 2 (PER.2). If additional schedules are needed, repeat the process for as many as are needed. Eight schedules are provided. See Table 4 for an example of setting the schedule. 10 48/50PD DISPLAY MENU TIMECLOCK SCH.L Table 4 Setting an Occupied Time Schedule - Weekdays Only for 7:30 to 22:30 SUB -- SUB MODE PER.1 KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Y ENTER Y ENTER ESCAPE B ENTER ENTER Y ENTER Y ENTER ESCAPE B ENTER Y ENTER ESCAPE B ENTER Y ENTER ESCAPE B ENTER Y ENTER ESCAPE B ENTER Y ENTER ESCAPE B ENTER Y ENTER ESCAPE ESCAPE ESCAPE ITEM OCC.1 OCC.1 UNC.1 UNC.1 MON.1 MON.1 TUE.1 TUE.1 WED.1 WED.1 THU.1 THU.1 FRI.1 FRI.1 DISPLAY 00.00 00.00 07.00 07.00 07.30 07.30 07.30 00.00 00.00 00.00 22.00 22.00 22.30 22.30 22.30 NO NO YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES ITEM EXPANSION Local Occupancy Schedule Period Occupied Time Period Occupied Time Period Unoccupied Time Period Unoccupied Time Monday In Period Monday In Period Tuesday In Period Tuesday In Period Wednesday In Period Wednesday In Period Thursday In Period Thursday In Period Friday In Period Friday In Period COMMENT Scrolling stops Hours Flash Select 7 Change accepted, minutes flash Select 30 Change accepted Item/Value/Units scrolls again Scrolling stops Hours Flash Select 22 Change accepted, minutes flash Select 30 Change accepted Item/Value/Units scrolls again Scrolling stops Select YES Change accepted Item/Value/Units scrolls again Scrolling stops Select YES Change accepted Item/Value/Units scrolls again Scrolling stops Select YES Change accepted Item/Value/Units scrolls again Scrolling stops Select YES Change accepted Item/Value/Units scrolls again Scrolling stops Select YES Change accepted Item/Value/Units scrolls again 11 48/50PD SERVICE TEST The Service Test function can be used to verify proper operation of compressors, heating stages, indoor fan, outdoor fans, power exhaust fans, economizer, crankcase heaters, and the alarm relay. Use of Service Test is recommended at initial system start up and during troubleshooting (See Table 5 for point details). Service Test mode has the following changes from normal operation: S Outdoor air temperature limits for cooling circuits, economizer, and heating are ignored. Normal compressor time guards and other staging delays are reduced to 30 seconds or less. S Circuit alerts are limited to 1 strike (versus 3) before changing to alarm shut down state. S The status of ALM.N is ignored so all alerts and alarms are broadcast on CCN. S The words "SERVICE TEST" are inserted into every alarm message. Service test can only be turned ON/OFF at the unit display. Once turned ON, other entries may be made with the display or through CCN. To turn Service Test on, change the value of TEST to ON. To turn service test off, change the value of TEST to OFF. IMPORTANT: Service Test mode may be password protected. Refer to Basic Control Usage section for more information. Depending on the unit model, factory--installed options, and field--installed accessories, some of the Service Test functions may not apply. Independent Outputs The independent (INDP) submenu is used to change output status for the economizer, power exhaust stages, crankcase heaters, and the alarm relay. These independent outputs can operate simultaneously with other Service Test modes. All outputs return to normal operation when Service Test is turned off. When the economizer is using the factory default Digital Control Type (ConfigurationECONE.CTL is 1 or 2) then the Economizer Calibration feature may be used to automatically check and reset the economizer actuator range of motion. Refer to the economizer operation section of more details. IMPORTANT: If a network force is applied to CCN points: ECONOCMD, PE_1, PE_2, or ALMOUT, their respective test mode functions will not be usable. Those forces are at a higher level than test mode; therefore they will still be honored when in test mode. Fan Test The fans (FANS) submenu is used to change output status for the indoor fan and outdoor fan stages. The VFD power can be turned on and off via IDF (Supply VFD Power Test). The indoor fan speed test (F.SPD) runs the fan at the desired speed entered. The outdoor fan relay test (OFC.1) only tests the relay for switching between high and low speeds. The actual outdoor fan will not run unless cool test is on. The cooling (COOL) and heating (HEAT) service test outputs are reset to OFF for the fans service test. Cooling Test The cooling (COOL) submenu is used to change output status for testing the cooling function. The fans (FANS) and heating (HEAT) service test outputs are reset to OFF for the cooling service test. The digital scroll controller power test (CTLR) turns on and off the compressor controller. The compressor capacity test (CPAC) is used to run the compressor at a desired capacity of 15% to 100%. If a capacity is chosen between 1 and 14, the capacity will be set to 15%. The outdoor fan will turn on to high speed when the compressor capacity is 15% or greater. The indoor fan speed will default to supply fan maximum speed (FS.MX) when the compressor capacity test is first activated. The cool test fan speed (F.SPD) is used to change the fan speed while the compressor is running. All normal cooling alarms and alerts are functional. IMPORTANT: When charging the unit, both the compressor capacity test and the cool test fan speed should be set to 100%. Heating Test The heating (HEAT) submenu is used to change output status for the individual heat stages, gas or electric. The fans (FANS) and cooling (COOL) service test outputs are reset to OFF for the heating service test. Indoor and outdoor fans are controlled normally to maintain proper unit operation. The indoor fan speed will run at the configured max speed FS.MX. All normal heating alarms and alerts are functional. Table 5 Service Test Modes and Submodes Directory DISPLAY MENU/ SUB -- MENU/ NAME SERVICE TEST TEST INDP ECON E.CAL PE.1 PE.2 ALRM CCH FANS SUPPLY IDF F.SPD OFC.1 COOL CTLR CAPC F.SPD HEAT HT.1 HT.2 EXPANDED NAME Field Service Test Mode Test Independent Outputs Economizer Position Test Calibrate Economizer Power Exhaust 1 Test Power Exhaust 2 Test Alarm Relay Test Crankcase Heat Test Test Fans VFD Power Test Indoor Fan Speed Test Outdoor Fan Relay Test Test Cooling Dig Scroll Ctrl Pwr Test Compressor Capacity Test Cool Test Fan Speed Test Heating Heat Stage 1 Test Heat Stage 2 Test VALUES On/Off 0 to 100% On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off 0 to 100% On/Off On/Off 0 to 100% 0 to 100% On/Off On/Off THIRD PARTY CONTROL Third party controls may interface with the unit ComfortLinkt controls through the connections described below. See other sections of these instructions for more information on the related unit control and configurations. Remote Occupancy The remote occupancy input is provided on the field connection terminal board (TB1). The Remote Occupancy Switch configuration, ConfigurationUNITRM.SW, identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input when unoccupied. S 5 = 24 VAC signal input S 6 = 24 VAC source for dry contact 12 48/50PD Fire Shutdown The fire shutdown input is provided for unit shutdown in response to a fire alarm or smoke detector. The Fire Shutdown Switch configuration, ConfigurationUNITFS.SW, identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input when there is no fire alarm. Input at field connection terminal board (TB1) S Fire Shutdown 1 = 24 VAC source for dry contact S Fire Shutdown 2 = 24 VAC signal input Alarm Output The alarm output is provided on the field connection terminal board (TB1) to indicate a current alarm status. The output will be 24VAC if a current alarm exists. S C = 24 VAC common S X = 24 VAC signal output Economizer Monitoring On field terminal board (TB1), terminals 8, 9, and 10 can be used to monitor economizer position from a third party control system. See economizer operation section for additional information. In digital mode (E.CTL = 1 or 2), the economizer commanded position can be read as a 2--10v or 4--20mA signal. TB1--8 and TB1--9 are used as follows: S To read a 2--10v signal, disconnect the violet wire on TB1--J10--8 and place volt meter device across TB1--8 and TB1--9. S To read a 4--20mA signal, disconnect the violet wire on TB1--J10--8 and the 500 resister at TB1--J10--6. Place amp meter device between TB1--8 and TB1--9. In analog mode (E.CTL = 3), the economizer position can be read as a 2--10v feedback signal across TB1--10 and TB1--9 at any time. IMPORTANT: The violet wire and 500 resister must be connected at the J10 connector as originally wired to operate the economizer in analog mode. Economizer Damper Control For units with the economizer option or accessory and the ECB control board, the damper position can be directly controlled through the IAQ sensor input provided on the field connection terminal board. The IAQ Analog Input configuration, ConfigurationAIR.QIA.CF will have to set to 3 (Control Minimum Position). When IA.CF = 3, an external 4 to 20 mA source is used to move the damper 0% to 100% directly. Terminal 2 = 4--20mA + signal Terminal 3 = 4--20mA -- common IMPORTANT: In this mode preset minimum positions configurations are not valid. The damper position may exceed the input position to provide economizer cooling and CO2 sensor input can not be used for DCV control. Refer to the Indoor Air Quality operation section for more information. CONTROLS OPERATION Display Configuration The ConfigurationDISP submenu is used to configure the local display settings. Metric Display (METR) This variable is used to change the display from English units to Metric units. Language Selection (LANG) This variable is used to change the language of the ComfortLinkt display. At this time, only English is available. Password Enable (PROT) This variable enables or disables the use of a password. The password is used to restrict use of the control to change configurations. Service Password (PSWD) This variable is the 4-digit numeric password that is required if enabled. Test Display LEDs (TEST) This is used to test the operation of the ComfortLink display. Unit Configuration Many configurations that indicate what factory options and/or field accessories are installed and other common operation variables are included in Unit Configuration (ConfigurationUNIT). These configurations will be set in the factory for factory--installed options (FIOP), and field installed accessories installed will require configuration changes. General unit and fan control configurations are also covered under this Unit Configuration menu. Start- Up Delay (S.DLY) This configuration sets the control start-up delay after the power is interrupted. This can be used to stagger the start-up of multiple units. Fan On When Occupied (OC.FN) A YES value will operate the indoor fan whenever the unit is in the Occupied mode. A NO value will operate the indoor fan only when heating or cooling is necessary. The factory default value is YES. Shut Down on IDF Failure (IDF.F) This configuration applies only if a fan switch is installed and configured. A YES value will enable diagnostic Alert T409 to shut down the unit when incorrect fan status is sensed. A NO value will still permit Alert T409 but will not cause unit shutdown. The factory default value is YES. Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX) This configuration sets the limit for the highest speed the fan can run out of 100%. This max speed limit applies to the unit at all times except for fan test. Supply Fan Minimum Speed (FS.MN) This configuration sets the limit for the lowest speed the fan can run out of 100%. This minimum speed limit applies to the unit during cooling mode and cooling test. Vent Mode Fan Speed (FS.VM) This configuration sets the speed the fan will run during the ventilation mode. The fan speed does not vary during ventilation so it will remain at this speed throughout vent mode. Fan Status Switch (FN.SW) This configuration identifies if a fan status switch is installed, and what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when the indoor fan is OFF. Filter Status Switch (FL.SW) This configuration identifies if a filter status switch is installed, and what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when the filter is CLEAN. Fire Shutdown Switch (FS.SW) This configuration identifies if a fire shutdown switch is installed, and what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when the fire or smoke alarm is OFF (no alarm). Remote Occupancy Switch (RM.SW) This configuration identifies if a remote occupancy switch is installed, and what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when UNOCCUPIED. 13 48/50PD RH Sensor On OAQ Input (RH.S) This configuration identifies if a space relative humidity sensor is installed on the outdoor air quality (OAQ) input. A YES value enables SP.RH display. A NO value disables SP.RH display and use. Space Humidity Switch (RH.SW) This configuration identifies if a space relative humidity switch is installed on the ENTHALPY input, and what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when the space humidity is LOW. Temperature Compensated Start Cooling Factor (TCS.C) This factor is used in the equation of the Temperature Compensated Start Time Bias for cooling. A setting of 0 minutes indicates Temperature Compensated Start in Cooling is not permitted. Temperature Compensated Start Heating Factor (TCS.H) This factor is used in the equation of the Temperature Compensated Start Time Bias for heating. A setting of 0 minutes indicates Temperature Compensated Start in Heating is not permitted. Modes The ComfortLinkt controls operate under a hierarchy of command structure as defined by four main elements: the System Mode, the HVAC Mode, the Occupied status, and the Unit Control Type. The System Mode is the top level that defines three main states of the control system: Disabled, Enabled, or Test. The HVAC Mode is the next level that defines four main states of functional operation: Disabled, Fan Only, Cool, and Heat. The Occupied status affects set points for cooling and heating in Space Sensor control mode and operation of the economizer for indoor air quality ventilation and free cooling. The general operating mode of the control and the status of some related operation lockouts are located on the display at two locations: Run Status MODE and Operating Modes MODE. System Mode (SYS) In Run Status and Operating Modes, the current system mode is displayed with expandable text. This is an overall state of the unit. Three states are: Unit Operation Disabled, Unit Operation Enabled, or Service Test Enabled. HVAC Mode (HVAC) In Run Status and Operating Modes, the current allowed HVAC mode is displayed with expandable text. This is the mode the unit decides to run in based on its inputs. There are four main HVAC modes; cooling has three different expanded texts. These modes are shown below. HVAC Mode Disabled Fan Only Cooling Heating Expanded Text HVAC Operation Disabled Ventilation (fan ---only) Cooling Free Cooling Unoccupied Free Cooling Heating Brief Description Unit is in test mode or System mode is disabled Fan may run for ventilation Mechanical cooling Only economizer used for cooling Only economizer use for cooling (occupied cooling set point active) Heating mode Remote HVAC Mode Disabled (HV.DN) Allow disabling of HVAC mode. This is only available on a network connection and shows if the unit has been forced into the disabled status. Cool Setpoint in Effect (EFF.C) This shows the actual setpoint that is being used for control during cooling mode. Heat Setpoint in Effect (EFF.H) This shows the actual setpoint that is being used for control during heating mode. Currently Occupied (OCC) Displays the current state of assumed space occupancy based on unit configuration and inputs. Timed Override in Effect (T.OVR) Displays if the state of occupancy is currently occupied due to an override. Linkage Active (LINK) Displays if Linkage communication is established between the unit and a Linkage source. IMPORTANT: The 48/50PD unit only supports the Gen III TEMP Monitor Thermostat. Demand Limit in Effect (D.LMT) Displays if a demand limit has been placed on the unit's capacity. Compressor OAT Lockout (C.LOC) Displays if one or more refrigerant circuits operation is prevented due to outdoor temperature limit lockout. Heat OAT Lockout (H.LOC) Displays if heating operation is prevented due to outdoor temperature limit lockout. Ok to Use Economizer? (OK.EC) Displays if the economizer is available for use during cooling. See economizer section for details on this point. General Operation 48/50PD units can provide cooling, dehumidification, heating, and ventilation operation. Each unit will operate under space temperature sensor control. There are many inputs, configurations, safety factors, and conditions that ultimately control the unit. Refer to the specific operation sections for detail on a specific unit operation. The unit will try to maintain the Space Temperature (Temperatures AIR.TSPT) between the effective cool and heat setpoints (Run StatusMODEEFF.C and EFF.H). However, to minimize unnecessary cool to heat and heat to cool changes, there is a 10 minute delay after the last stage turns off before the control will switch modes and a 1 minute delay when re--entering the last mode. The cooling and heating Mode Select Timeguard (Operating ModesCOOLMS.TG) and (Operating Modes HEATMS.TG) show the remaining time before allowing the respective mode to be entered. Setpoint Determination Setpoints are used to control the unit. The Cool Setpoint in Effect (EFF.C) and the Heat Setpoint in Effect (EFF.H) are the points in which the unit is controlling to at a specific time. These points are read only points and change according to occupancy, the offset slider status, and network writes. If the building is in occupied mode, the Occupied Cool Setpoint (SetpointsOCSP) and the Occupied Heat Setpoint (Setpoints OHSP) are active. When the building is in unoccupied mode, the Unoccupied Cool Setpoint (SetpointsUCSP) and the Unoccupied Heat Setpoint (SetpointsUHSP) are active. The heating and cooling set points are also separated by a Heat--Cool Set Point Gap (SetpointsGAP) that is user configurable from 2 to 10 degrees F. This parameter will not allow the setpoints to be set too close together, it will change the last setpoint adjusted if it is set within the GAP. 14 When the space sensor has a setpoint slider adjustment, the cool and heat setpoints (occupied) can be offset by sliding the bar from one side to the other. The SPT Offset Range (+/--) (Setpoints STO.R) sets the total positive or negative degrees that can be added to the setpoints. With the slider in the middle, no offset is applied. Moving the slider to the "COOL" side will subtract from each setpoint, and sliding it to the "WARM" side will add to the setpoints. The slider offset being applied at any given time is displayed as Space Temperature Offset (TemperaturesAIR.T SPTO). Occupancy Determination The building's occupancy is affected by a number of different factors. Occupancy affects the unit set points and the operation of the economizer. The factors affecting occupancy are listed below from highest to lowest priority. Level 1 Priority Level 1 classification is a force/write to occupancy and can occur three ways. Listed in order of priority: force on OCCUPIED, a write to NVI_OCC, and a Linkage write. The CCN point OCCUPIED is forced via an external device such as a ComfortIDt controller or a service tool. When OCCUPIED is forced to YES, the unit is considered occupied; when OCCUPIED is forced to NO, the unit is considered unoccupied. If the 3rd party protocol LON is writing to NVI_OCC, the control maps it to OCCUPIED as an input. If the unit is being controlled by Linkage, the occupancy is communicated and mapped to OCCUPIED as an input. LON and Linkage do not force the point, only write to it, therefore a force applied to OCCUPIED will override them. If OCCUPIED is not being forced or written to, proceed to the level 2 priority. Level 2 Priority Remote Occupancy Switch should be configured to either Normally Open or Normally Closed when the user would like to control the occupancy with an external switch. This switch is field--supplied (24v, single pole, single throw [SPST]). There are three possible configurations for the remote occupancy switch: 1. (ConfigurationUNITRM.SW = 0) No Switch 2. (ConfigurationUNITRM.SW = 1) Normally Open Switch 3. (ConfigurationUNITRM.SW = 2) Normally Closed Switch If the switch is configured to No Switch (0), the switch input value will be ignored and software will proceed to level 3 priority. For each type of switch, the appropriate configuration and states are listed in the table below. TYPE OF SWITCH Occupied When Closed or Unoccupied When Open Occupied When Open or Unoccupied When Closed SWITCH CONFIGURATION Normal Open (1) Normal Closed (2) STATE OF SWITCH AND STATE OF OCCUPANCY Open and Unoccupied Closed and Occupied Open and Occupied Closed and Unoccupied NOTE: To perform remote occupancy, an Economizer Control Board must be installed in the unit. Level 3 Priority The following occupancy options are determined by the state of Occupancy Schedule Number (ConfigurationCCNSCH.O SCH.N) and the Global Schedule Broadcast (Configuration CCN BRODB.GS). 1. (ConfigurationCCNSCH.OSCH.N = 0) The unit is always considered occupied and the programmed schedule is ignored. This is the factory default. 2. (ConfigurationCCNSCH.OSCH.N = 1- 64) Follow the local programmed schedule. Schedules 1 to 64 are local within the controller. The unit can only store one local schedule and therefore changing this number only changes the title of the schedule table. 3. (ConfigurationCCNSCH.OSCH.N = 65- 99) Follow the global programmed schedule. If the unit is configured as a Global Schedule Broadcaster (ConfigurationCCNBRODB.GS = YES), the unit will follow the unit's programmed schedule and broadcast the schedule so that other devices programmed to follow this schedule number can receive the schedule. If the unit is not programmed as a Global Schedule Broadcaster (ConfigurationCCNBRODB.GS = NO), the unit will receive broadcasted schedules from a unit programmed to broadcast this schedule number. While using the programmed schedule, occupancy can be temporarily switched from unoccupied to occupied by pressing the override button for approximately 3 seconds on the T--55, T--56, T--58 or T--59 space temperature sensor. Override will only occur if SPT Override Enabled (Configuration CCNSCH.OOV.SP) is set to YES. The length of the override period when pressing the override button is determined by the Override Time Limit (Configuration CCNSCH.OOV.TL). The hours remaining in override are displayed as Timed Override Hours (ConfigurationCCNSCH.OOV.EX). This point can also be changed from the local display or network to set or change the override period length. Indoor Fan Operation The indoor fan is controlled by the Indoor Fan VFD Power Relay (OutputsFANSIDF) on the MBB (main base board) control, which then operates the indoor fan contactor (IFC). The Indoor Fan VFD Power Relay (IDF) is always on when the unit is powered up so that power is supplied to the VFD electronic boards. This is unless the unit is put in test mode or if the System Mode (SYS) status is disabled. If configured for fan status switch (FN.SW) and Shut Down on IDF Failure (ConfigurationUNIT IDF.F = Yes) is enabled, the fan status can shutdown the VFD. The Commanded Fan Speed (OutputsFANSF.SPD) represents the controls commanded speed for the fan at any given time. This commanded speed is determined by the unit's current HVAC mode and the FAN ON When Occupied (Configuration UNITOC.FN) configuration. If the indoor fan is configured for occupied fan (OC.FN = Yes), the fan speed is not allowed to drop to 0 while the unit is occupied. If there is not a cooling or heating demand for the fan, its commanded speed will be at the Vent Mode Fan Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.VM). If the indoor fan is configured for intermittent fan (OC.FN = No), the fan speed (F.SPD) will be greater then 0 when there is a cooling, heating, dehumidification, or air quality demand. During the unoccupied period, the fan will always operate intermittent. With intermittent fan, the speed will drop to 0 after a configurable time delay with respect to the HVAC mode that is ending. The Fan--off Delay delays are as follows: Mech Cool (ConfigurationCOOL FOD.C), Elect Heat (ConfigurationHEATFOD.E), and Gas Heat (ConfigurationHEATFOD.G). The fan will override to remain on at last commanded speed if compressors or heat relays are ever stuck on. If configured for IAQ fan operation, the fan will run at the Vent Mode Fan Speed (FS.VM) to satisfy air quality demands. See the Indoor Air Quality section if using IAQ (indoor air quality) accessory sensors. When the unit is in heating mode (gas heat or electric heat mode) the indoor fan will operate at the Supply Fan Maximum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MX) setting. For gas heating units, the IGC control fan output is also monitored by the MBB control. This can result in additional modification of fan delays or other operation due to safety functions of the IGC control. 15 48/50PD 48/50PD When the unit is in cooling or unoccupied free cooling mode, the supply fan will modulate between the configured Supply Fan Maximum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MX) and the Supply Fan Minimum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MN) to maintain the space temperature sensor set point. This modulation is based on the space temperature trend and the cooling demand trend. The fan will attempt to control the space by modulating under normal operating conditions and dehumidification reset. Cooling reset will occur when the fan is locked at max or min speed. Refer to Cooling operation for more information on fan operation during cooling. Cooling Operation The 48/50PD unit's cooling operation consists of: demand and mode determination, capacity request to satisfy the demand, and handling a request with the unit's resources. These resources include a variable speed fan, compressor, and an economizer (if installed). This section covers cooling fan speed operation, mechanical cooling, and dehumidification. For economizer cooling and operation, refer to the Economizer section. The unit enters a cooling mode based on a demand, then tries to find a steady state to run to balance the space's load. If the demand changes or the unit satisfies the cooling demand, the cooling mode will end. Cooling Mode The cooling HVAC mode (Run StatusMODEHVAC=3) has two different expandable texts: Cooling and Unoccupied Free Cooling. These are part of the general cooling mode and resemble the specific type of cooling that is being performed at any given time. The expanded text is for user reference only. The control will display if it is ok to select the cooling mode (Operating Modes COOLOK.CL= Yes). For the unit to enter cooling mode, four things must be true: the indoor fan must be ok to use, the mode changeover time guard must be expired, the unit must have a valid space temperature or valid supply air temperature, and there must be a cooling or dehumidification demand. The unit will remain in cooling for at least one minute and until the cool demand drops below --0.5_F for 5 minutes or if any of the above conditions turn false. If only a dehumidification demand exists and the heat demand becomes greater then --1_F, the unit will end cooling. The cooling mode can not officially end until the compressor is off. Cooling Control Once the unit is in a cooling mode, it must decide what the demand is and how to handle it. The unit will modulate the indoor fan speed to supply more or less airflow to the space at the current Supply Air Temperature (TemperaturesAIR.TSAT) based on the effective cool setpoint (EFF.C). The compressor will modulate to maintain a specific SAT based on the Cool Supply Air Set Point (SetpointSASP). If an economizer is installed and can be used for cooling, the unit will use it first (see economizer section for its operation). If the economizer can not be used or additional cooling is needed, a mechanical cooling check is performed. OK to use Compressor? (Operating ModesCOOLOK.MC), will be set to yes when the compressor is enabled and not locked out. The Compressor Lockout Temp (ConfigurationCOOLC.LO) configuration tells the unit what outside temperature and above that the compressor is allowed to run. Compressor OAT Lockout (Run StatusMODEC.LOC) displays yes when the outdoor temperature is too low for compressor operation. The Fan Speed Control Demand (ConfigurationCOOL FS.CD) configuration sets the fan operation window. When the temperature in the conditioned space is higher than the effective cool setpoint (EFF.C) plus the Fan Speed Control Demand (FS.CD), the indoor fan will run at 100%. When the temperature in the conditioned space is between the effective cool setpoint (EFF.C) and the effective cool setpoint (EFF.C) plus the Fan Speed Control Demand (FS.CD), the indoor fan will modulate on a curve to maintain the effective cool setpoint (EFF.C). (See Fig. 6.) This modulation is based on the space temperature trend and the cooling demand trend. The space temperature trend is displayed as Spacetemp Trend (Operating ModesCOOLSPTTRND). The cooling demand trend is the rate of change of Cooling Demand (Run StatusCOOLDMD.C). (See Fig. 6.) The Compressor requested cooling capacity (Operating Modes COOLREQ.C) is determined by a Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) algorithm that controls the Supply Air Temperature to the Supply Air Control Point (Run StatusCOOL SA.CP) based on the Supply Air Temp Demand (Operating ModesCOOLSA.DM). This demand is the difference between the actual supply temperature and the current control point. The current control point Supply Air Control Point (SA.CP) is the result of adding the Cool Supply Air Setpoint (SASP), the Cool Demand SASP Reset (Run StatusCOOLSR.CD), and the Dehumidifying SASP Reset (Run StatusCOOLSR.RH). Reset is a cooling function that adjusts the supply air setpoint to allow cooler or warmer supply air than what the supply air setpoint (SASP) is set for. Cool reset is needed when the fan speed cannot maintain the space temperature with the current supply air temperature within a reasonable time. After the fan reaches its maximum speed (FS.MX) or its minimum speed (FS.MN) for 2 minutes, cool reset can then start to be applied. The amount of cool reset is determined by the cooling demand (DMD.C) and will change to follow a curve based on the Spacetemp Trend (TRND). Cool Demand SASP Reset (Run StatusCOOLSR.CD) defines the current amount of cool reset applied to the supply air setpoint (SASP) and is limited by two configurations: SASP Maximum Reset Down (ConfigurationCOOLSATSA.MD) and SASP Maximum Reset Up (ConfigurationCOOLSAT SA.MU). The SASP Maximum Reset Down (SA.MD) configuration sets how far below the Cool Supply Air Set Point (SASP) the control is allowed to reset. The SASP Maximum Reset Up (SA.MU) configuration sets how far above the Cool Supply Air Set Point (SASP) the control is allowed to reset. If the cooling demand (DMD.C) is less than or equal to Speed Control Demand (FS.CD), the maximum downward reset (SA.MD) will be applied and the fan speed (F.SPD) is then locked at max speed (FS.MX). If the cooling demand (DMD.C) is greater than or equal to negative Speed Control Demand (--FS.CD), the maximum upward reset (SA.MU) will be applied and the fan speed (F.SPD) is then locked at the minimum speed (FS.MN). When cool reset is no longer needed, the control will start removing the reset until all reset is removed and the Supply Air Control Point (SA.CP) is back to the original Supply Air Set Point (SASP). The indoor fan speed (F.SPD) will then unlock and modulate to maintain the Space Temperature (SPT) along the defined time temperature curve to effective cool setpoiint (EFF.C). 16 Temperature 48/50PD Space Temperature OCSP + FS.CD Unit Supply Fan Speed Set to 100% Cooling Speed Demand Window - Unit Supply Fan Speed Modulates to Move Space Temperature along a Defined Curve to the Effective Cool Set Point (EFF.C) OCSP OCSP - 0.5 F Unit Supply Fan in Ventilation Mode, Supply Fan Speed User Configurable Time Fig. 6 -- Indoor Fan Speed Modulation Curve C09245 Dehumidification Control Dehumidification operation requires installation and configuration of either a space relative humidity sensor or a relative humidity switch input. Space Humidity Switch (ConfigurationUNIT RH.SW) set to 1 for use of a normally open switch or 2 for normally closed switch. The switch is wired to the field connection terminal board terminals R and W2. RH Sensor on OAQ Input (ConfigurationUNITRH.S) set to Yes for use of a 4 to 20 mA output RH sensor wired to field connection terminal board terminals 1 and 4 (for loop powered). RH Sensor Value at 4ma (ConfigurationAIR.QH.4M) sets the % display for a 4mA input from the relative humidity sensor. RH Sensor Value at 20ma (ConfigurationAIR.QH.20M) sets the % display for a 20mA input from the relative humidity sensor. Dehumidification is a cooling mode function. When using a humidistat or switch input, the demand for dehumidification is seen as Space Humidity Switch (InputsGEN.IHUM) being Low or High. A low value means humidity level is good and a high value means that dehumidification is needed. When using an RH sensor, the demand is based on the Space Humidity Sensor (InputsAIR.QSP.RH) value compared to the Space RH Setpoint (SetpointsRH.SP). If the Space Humidity Sensor (SP.RH) value is above the Space RH Setpoint (RH.SP), then dehumidification is needed. If the Space Humidity Sensor (SP.RH) value is below the Space RH Setpoint (RH.SP) minus the Space RH Deadband (SetpointsRH.DB), then dehumidification is no longer needed. When there is a dehumidification demand, the control will try to satisfy it by resetting the Cool Supply Air Setpoint (Setpoint SASP) downwards. Dehumidifying SASP Reset (Run Status COOLSR.RH) defines the current amount of dehumidifying reset being applied. Dehumidifying reset can only decrease the cool supply air setpoint (SASP). If the fan speed (F.SPD) was locked at min or max for Cool Demand SASP Reset (SR.CD), it will be unlocked to modulate to control the space temperature and the Cool Demand SASP Reset (SR.CD) will be locked at its current value. The dehumidifying SASP Reset (SR.RH) will increase one degree every 5 minutes until the dehumidification demand is satisfied. Once satisfied, the dehumidifying SASP Reset (SR.RH) will decrease one degree every 3 minutes until it reaches 0. The dehumidifying SASP Reset (SR.RH) is subtracted from the current Supply Air Control Point (Run StatusCOOLSA.CP) to create the new Supply Air Control Point (SA.CP). Compressor Control The control will try to provide the capacity that is requested, but has some limitations. When the compressor turns on, it must honor a soft start. This limits the capacity to 15% for the first 15 seconds and then allows up to 20 additional percent every 15 seconds for the first minute. The Min Compressor Capacity (Configuration COOLMIN.C) configuration sets the lowest allowed capacity during normal operation. This minimum can only be violated under three conditions: the soft start for the compressor, low pressure override, or if the economizer is being used for free cooling. There are time guards to protect the compressors, Compressor Min On Time (ConfigurationCOOLMRT.C) and Compressor Min Off Time (ConfigurationCOOLMOT.C) apply before a compressor can be turned back on or turned off. Circuit diagnostic tests are performed during operation which may or may not allow a compressor to be used. Compressor A Timeguard (Run StatusCOOLTG.A) displays the time the compressor has before it is available for use. Compressor A Feedback (Run StatusCOOLCMP.A) is displayed on when the digital scroll controller (DSC) turns on the compressor. The Compressor Capacity (OutputsCOOLCAPC) displays the actual running capacity of the compressor at any given time. NOTE: The Compressor Minimum Capacity (MIN.C) is configured at the factory to 70%. This is the minimum compressor capacity that gives the highest SEER rating for a 48 series unit with the highest gas heat option and no economizer per AHRI standard 210/240. Since the AHRI rating standard does not account for energy savings that can be realized by displacement ventilation air distribution system and extending economizer cooling operation at higher supply air temperature set points, a complete energy analysis should be conducted before changing the Compressor Minimum Capacity (MIN.C) setting to determine the energy savings at that lower Compressor Minimum Capacity (MIN.C) setting. 17 48/50PD Table 6 Fan Level Control of Outdoor Fan FAN LEVEL FAN SPEED 0 OFF CONDITIONS TO TRANSITION TO NEXT LOWER LEVEL N/A 1 LOW 1. Compressor Contactor is OFF 1. Outside Air Temperature Control --- --- Fan Lev2 Off Temperature 45_F or below (ConfigurationCOOLOFC2.OFF<=45_F)* 2 HIGH 2. Condenser Pressure A Override --- --- Fan Lev2 Min Pressure 200 psig or below (ConfigurationCOOLOFC2.MNP<=200 psig)* CONDITIONS TO TRANSITION TO NEXT HIGHER LEVEL 1. Compressor Contactor is ON (on initial start up outdoor fan runs at Level 2 for 10 seconds before moving to correct level based on outside air temperature or Condenser Pressure A) 1. Outside Air Temperature Control --- --- Fan Lev2 On Temperature 55_F or above (ConfigurationCOOLOFC2.ON>=55_F)* 2. Condenser Pressure A Override --- --- Fan Lev1 MAX Pressure 450 psig or above (ConfigurationCOOLOFC1.MXP>=450 psig)* N/A Outdoor Fan Control Each unit has a means for variable outdoor airflow to control condenser pressure control within an acceptable range by responding to varied operating modes and ambient temperatures. This is implemented using multi--speed motors. The outdoor fan contactor (OutputsFANSOFC.1), is powered on the load side of the compressor contactor so the outdoor fans will run only when the compressor contactor is energized. When the outdoor fan contactor is not energized, its normally closed contacts will run the outdoor fan at high speed. When the outdoor fan contactor is energized, its normally open contacts will close and the outdoor fan runs at low speed. The outdoor fan speed is controlled by levels. There are 3 levels of operation (0--2) and the current operating level is shown as Outdoor Fan Level (Operating ModesCOOLF.LEV). The fan level selected during operation is based on factory configurations of outdoor temperature limits and condenser pressure limits. These are in the Outdoor Fan Control submenu (ConfigurationCOOLOFC) and shown in Table 6. The starting level is picked after a compressor is turned on and is based on the Outdoor Air Temperature (TemperaturesAIR.TOAT). The circuit's Saturated Condensing Temperature (Temperatures REF.TSCT.A) can override the fan level at any time. NOTE: Factory default configurations account for model differences and should not be changed. The default configurations have been qualified over a large range of conditions and are provided in case a field replacement of a control board occurs and the settings need to be checked or manually configured. Outdoor fan operation is further described below to assist in troubleshooting. Heating Operation The 48/50PD unit's heating operation consists of: demand and mode determination, staging request to satisfy the demand, and handling a request with the unit's resources. These resources can be gas heat or electric heat. This section covers both gas heat units and electric heat units. The Type of Heat Installed (Configuration HEATHT.TY) configuration will be factory set to 1 for gas units, 2 for electric heat units with heaters installed, and 0 for electric heat units without heat installed. The unit enters a heating mode based on a demand, decides how to satisfy the demand, executes its plan, and then leaves the heating mode. Heating Mode Control The heating HVAC mode (Run StatusMODEHVAC=4) represents both types of heating (gas or electric) under all types of control. For the unit to be allowed to enter the heat mode, six things must be true: the indoor fan must be ok to use, the mode changeover time guard must be expired, the unit must have a valid space temperature, heat must be enabled (HT.TY = 1 or 2), the Outdoor Air Temperature (TemperaturesAIR.TOAT) must be less then the Heating Lockout Temp (ConfigurationHEAT HT.LO) and there must be a heating demand. Heat OAT Lockout (Run StatusMODEH.LOC) displays when heat is locked out on outdoor temperature and therefore can not allow heat mode. The control will display if it is ok to select the heating mode (Operating ModesHEAT OK.HT= Yes). The unit will remain in heating for at least one minute and until the demand is dropped or if any of the above conditions turn false. The heating mode can not officially end until all heat stages are off and the IGC fan request is dropped. Supply- Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) The SAT Heat Mode Sensing (Configuration HEATSATSAT.H) informs the unit that the supply air sensor has been relocated downstream of the heat section. This configuration affects the Supply Air Temperature (Temperatures AIR.TSAT) value displayed as listed below. When SAT.H = DSBL, the Supply Air Temperature (Temperatures AIR.TSAT) value on the Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables will be forced to zero when heat outputs come ON and for 5 minutes after. The default Supply Air Temperature location is at the fan inlet, upstream of the heat section. 18 48/50PD When SAT.H = ENBL, the Supply Air Temperature (Temperatures AIR.TSAT) sensor reading is displayed at the Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables during heating mode. This setting should only be used if the original SAT sensor wires are removed from the Main Base Board (MBB) and replaced by an accessory SAT sensor located in the supply duct downstream of the heat section. There are then two supply air temperature limits that become active, the Maximum SAT Lower Level (Configuration HEATSATSAM.L) the Maximum SAT Upper Level (ConfigurationHEATSATSAM.U). Any time the supply air temperature rises above SAM.L, the heat staging will be limited to what is currently on and no additional stages can be added until the supply air temperature falls back below SAM.L. If the supply air temperature rises above SAM.U, then heating will be reduced by removing a heat stage. That stage can not be added again until the Supply Air Temperature falls below SAM.L. If the supply air temperature stays above SAM.U, then another stage will be removed after the Heat Stage Decrease Time (Configuration HEATH.DEC). If SAM.L and SAM.U are configured so that they are close together, the last stage of heat might cycle rapidly, slowed only by its minimum on and off--time requirements. Staging Control Once the unit is in a heating mode, it must decide what the demand is and how to satisfy. Requested Heating Stages (Run Status HEATREQ.H) will be determined then passed to heat control to actually add the heating stages. Heat staging control is an adaptive anticipation control that weighs the actual demand against the trend of that space. It also honors stage time guards and supply air limits. The demand for heating in the space is displayed as the Heating Demand (Run Status HEATDMD.H). The control tries to anticipate the change in the space because of its current stage status. This anticipation is based on the Spacetemp Trend (Operating ModesHEAT SPTTRND). This trend will show the control how the space is reacting to the current running conditions and help it decide when to add or remove one stage from the requested stages. The Heat Stage Increase Time (ConfigurationHEATH.INC) or the Heat Stage Decrease Time (ConfigurationHEATH.DEC) has to expire before another stage can be added or a stage can be subtracted. If at any time the Supply--Air Temperature (SAT) falls below the Maximum Supply Air Temperature Lower Level (ConfigurationHEATSATSAM.L), the requested stages will not be allowed to increase. If at any time the SAT falls below the Maximum Supply Air Temperature Upper Level (ConfigurationHEATSATSAM.U), the requested stages will be reduced by one without honoring H.DEC. Heat Relay Control The heat relay control is responsible for energizing or de--energizing the heat stage relays and works hand and hand with the staging control. As the staging control requests stages, the heat relay control determines what actual heat relays are available or energized and tries to provide stages for what is requested. The availability of a heat relay depends on the heat installed, how many stages, and time guards. The type of Heat Installed (ConfigurationHEATHT.TY) must be set for gas or electric for any stages to be available. The Number of Heat Stages (ConfigurationHEATN.HTR) configuration tells the control how many heat relays can be used. Heat Stage 1 Timeguard (Run StatusHEATTG.H1) and Heat Stage 2 Timeguard (Run StatusHEATTG.H2) display the time a respective heat relay has before it is available for use. The available stages at any given time are displayed as Available Heating Stages (Run StatusHEATAVL.H). The actual heat relays on at any given time are displayed as Actual Heating Stages (Operating ModesHEATACT.H). Heat Stage 1 Relay (Run StatusHEATHT.1) and Heat Stage 2 Relay (Run Status HEATHT.2) are displayed on when the respective relay is energized. There are time guards to protect from short cycling, Heat Minimum On Time (ConfigurationHEATMRT.H) and Heat Minimum Off Time (ConfigurationHEATMOT.H) apply before a heat relay can be turned back on or turned off. Integrated Gas Controller (IGC) The heat staging is determined as described above and the Integrated Gas Controller (IGC) initiates the gas heat module start--up. The Integrated Gas Controller (IGC) minimum on--time of 1 minute will be followed even if Heat Minimum On Time (ConfigurationHEATMRT.H) is lower and during Service Test. If the IGC temperature limit switch opens within 10 minutes of the end of the gas heat cycle, the next fan off delay will be extended by 15 seconds. The maximum delay is 3 minutes. Once modified by the IGC, the fan off delay will not change back to the configured Fan--off Delay, Gas Heat (ConfigurationHEAT FOD.G) unless power is reset to the control. A light emitting diode (LED) is provided on the IGC to indicate status. During normal operation the LED is continuously on. See the Troubleshooting section if the LED is off or flashing. The IGC is located behind the gas section access panel door. When the control energizes Heat Stage 1 Relay (Run Status HEATHT.1), power is sent to the W terminal on the IGC board. A check is made to ensure that the rollout switch and limit switch are closed. The induced--draft motor is then energized, and when speed is proven with the Hall Effect sensor on the motor, the ignition activation period begins. The burners will ignite within 5 seconds. If the burners do not light, there is a 22--second delay before another 5--second attempt. If the burners still do not light, this sequence is repeated for 15 minutes. After the 15 minutes have elapsed, if the burners still have not lit, heating is locked out. The control will reset when the request for heat is temporarily removed. When ignition occurs, the IGC board will continue to monitor the condition of the rollout switch, limit switches, the Hall Effect sensor, as well as the flame sensor. If the unit is set for fan auto, 45 seconds after ignition occurs the indoor--fan motor will be energized (and the outdoor--air dampers will open to their minimum position). If for some reason the over temperature limit opens prior to the start of the indoor fan blower, on the next attempt, the 45--second delay will be shortened to 5 seconds less than the time from initiation of heat to when the limit tripped. Gas will not be interrupted to the burners and heating will continue. Once modified, the fan on delay will not change back to 45 seconds unless power is reset to the control. When the control energizes Heat Stage 2 Relay (Run StatusHEATHT.2), power is supplied to the second stage of the main gas valve. If both stage 1 and stage 2 of the gas valve close, gas will be turned off to the main burners. Economizer Operation If an economizer is installed, then Economizer Installed (ConfigurationUNITEC.EN) should be set to YES. The economizer damper is controlled by the Econo Commanded Position (OutputsECONEC.CP) on the Economizer Control Board (ECB). Feed back from the economizer actuator is output to the ECB and is displayed as Econo Actual Position (Outputs ECONEC.AP). The Economizer is used for ventilation, cooling and to control the power exhaust. If the Indoor fan is not on, the economizer will not operate. 19 48/50PD Economizer Actuator Communication The economizer actuator used with the 48/50PD units is a Multi--Function Technology (MFT) actuator. This allows the ComfortLink system to communicate with the actuator digitally using Belimo MP protocol. The configuration Economizer Control Type (ConfigurationECONE.CTL) determines the communication method, either digital or analog, used to communicate between the Economizer Control Board and the economizer actuator. NOTE: The power to the unit must be cycled after the Economizer Control Type (ConfigurationECONE.CTL) configuration parameter is changed. E.CTL = 1 or 2 (Digital/Position or Digital/Command) When Economizer Control Type (ConfigurationECON E.CTL) is set to 1, the Economizer Control Board will communicate with the economizer actuator using the digital protocol, from Economizer Control Board plug J7--1 to actuator pin 5. The commanded position and the actuators actual position are communicated back and forth between the actuator and the Economizer Control Board. When the Economizer Control Board and actuator first initiate communication, a Control Angle (Operating ModesECONC.ANG) is provided to the Economizer Control Board and defines the actuator's range of motion. The control angle must be greater than the Min Actuator Ctrl Angle (ConfigurationECONM.ANG). During this digital control, the Economizer Control Board analog 4 to 20 mA output will represent the actuator's actual position when E.CTL = 1 or commanded position when E.CTL =2. Because the wiring has a built--in 500--ohm resistor, the 4 to 20mA signal is converted to a 2 to 10VDC signal that is accessible via the field connected terminal board TB--8 and TB--9. However, before this signal can be read remotely, the violet wire that connects the actuator to field connection terminal board TB--J10--8 must be removed or cut. E.CTL = 3 (Analog Control) When E.CTL is set to 3, the Economizer Control Board will NOT communicate with the actuator using digital MFT. It will instead control the economizer actuator directly with the 4 to 20mA analog signal wired to TB--8 and TB--9 along with the 500--ohm resistor producing a 2 to 10VDC signal for the actuator. While in this mode, the actuator's built--in 2 to 10VDC feedback signal is accessible via TB--9 and TB--10 any time because it is not used by the Economizer Control Board. Minimum Ventilation The economizer will open to allow ventilation when the indoor fan is turned on and the unit is in the occupied state. The economizer damper position at any given time for ventilation is displayed as the Min Position in Effect (Run StatusECONEC.MP). This minimum position can be effected by the indoor fan speed (F.SPD) and indoor air quality. To maintain a constant airflow through the economizer, as the indoor fan speed decreases or increases, the damper minimum position will increase or decrease, respectively. This relationship curve is shown in Fig. 7. These units can also be equipped with optional CO2 sensors for additional indoor air quality control. When unit is equipped with a return duct CO2 sensor or return duct CO2 sensor and outside air CO2 sensor the Economizer minimum position vs. fan speed curve will be recalculated based on the CO2 level of the return and/or outside air as shown in Fig. 7. When the Commanded Fan Speed (F.SPD) is between Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX) and the Supply Fan Minimum Speed (FS.MN) the damper will operate in the shaded area of Fig. 7 based on the IAQ Level (IAQ). See the Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) section for more details on Demand Control Ventilation (DCV). Economizer Position % 100 75 MAX.P 50 MP.25 MP.50 MP.25 DCV 25 MP.75 MP.MX MP.50 DCV MP.75 DCV AQ.MN for DCV 0 Fan Speed % 0 20 25 50 75 100 Minimum Configurable Fan Speed is 20% Fig. 7 -- Minimum Damper Position Curve C09246 20 48/50PD The shape of the Economizer Minimum Position vs. Fan Speed curve is determined by the configuration parameters: Econ Min at 25% Fan speed (ConfigurationECONMP.25), Econ Min at 50% Fan speed (ConfigurationECONMP.50), Econ Min at 75% Fan speed (ConfigurationECONMP.75) and Econ Min at Max Fan speed (ConfigurationECONMP.MX). These configurations are preset at the factory for default purposes. The Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (MP.MX) should be changed based on the air balance of the unit for proper ventilation. The Econ Min at 25% Fan speed (MP.25), Econ Min at 50% Fan speed (MP.50) and Econ Min at 75% Fan speed (MP.75) damper positions will be calculated and changed automatically after changing the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (MP.MX) and Supply Fan Maximum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MX). The damper position curve can be field adjusted per application, if needed. The Econ Min at 25% Fan speed (Configuration ECONMP.25), Econ Min at 50% Fan speed (Configuration ECONMP.50) and Econ Min at 75% Fan speed (ConfigurationECONMP.75) damper position are user configurable and can be determined by setting the fan speed at 25, 50 and 75% and determining the damper position required to maintain the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration ECONMP.MX) outside air CFM through the economizer outside air dampers. The default calculations programmed into the PD controls are based on a side shot economizer at 400 CFM/TON Supply Air flow with negative 0.25 in H2O pressure in the return duct. Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (FS.MN) is set by user based on minimum required outside air ventilation CFM required for the application. This procedure would be the same as if this were a CV unit with the unit running at the design point CFM. This determines the minimum position amount of outside air CFM required when the fan is running at maximum speed. See the Evaporator Fan Set--up section under start--up for more information. Free Cooling The economizer will be allowed to help with cooling (Run Status MODEOK.EC = Yes) if the supply air temperature sensor reading is valid, there are no applied lockouts, and there is not a dehumidification demand. There are four economizer lockouts that can be applied at any time. Econo Cool OAT Lockout (Operating ModesECONE.LOC) occurs when the Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) is greater than the configured Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit (ConfigurationECONEH.LO) or less than the configured Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit (ConfigurationECON EL.LO). Econo Diff DBulb Lockout (Operating Modes ECOND.LOC) occurs when Diff Dry Bulb Control is enabled (ConfigurationECONDF.DB = Enable) and the return air temperature (RAT) is lower then the outdoor air temperature (OAT). Econo Cool Enth Lockout (Operating ModesECON EN.LO) occurs when an enthalpy sensor is installed and the Outdoor Enthalpy is HIGH. OAQ Lockout Mode (Operating ModesECONAQ.LO) occurs when the outdoor air quality sensor is configured for lockout and the value is greater then the OAQ Lockout Limit (ConfigurationAIR.QOAQ.L). Any one of these lockouts will disable economizer free cooling. If the economizer is available for cooling, the economizer outside air and return air dampers will modulate to allow proportions of outside air and return air to mix and produce a supply air temperature equal to the Supply Air Control Point (Run StatusCOOLSA.CP). The damper will open from the Min Position In Effect (Run StatusECON EC.MP) to the Econo Cool Max Position (Configuration ECONEC.MX). If the economizer is not able to satisfy the Supply Air Control Point (SA.CP), the compressor will turn on and modulate to provide additional cooling. The economizer will then be left at max position and the compressor will be allowed to violate Min Compressor Capacity (MIN.C) and ramp down to 15% capacity. Unoccupied Free Cooling The unoccupied free cooling algorithm attempts to maintain the building space half way between the Occupied Cool Set Point (SetpointsOCSP) and Occupied Heat Set Point (Setpoints OHSP) using only the economizer when the conditions in the building and the outdoors are suitable, during unoccupied periods. Three different configurations define this algorithm: Unoccupied Free Cooling (ConfigurationECONUEFC), Free Cooling Preoccupancy Time (ConfigurationECONFC.TM), and Free Cool Low Temp Limit (ConfigurationECONFC.LO). UEFC = 0 (Disabled) When UEFC = 0, unoccupied free cooling is disabled. Cooling will only occur if the space exceeds the unoccupied setpoints. UEFC = 1 (Unoccupied) When UEFC is set to 1, unoccupied free cooling can occur throughout the entire unoccupied period. The space temperature must be higher than the mid--point between the occupied cooling and heating setpoints. UEFC = 2 (Preoccupancy) When UEFC is set to 2, unoccupied free cooling can only occur when the time until the next occupied period is less than the Free Cool PreOcc Time (FC.TM) in minutes. Free Cool PreOcc Time (FC.TM) FC.TM is the configuration that determines how many minutes before occupancy that free cooling can occur when set for Preoccupancy (UEFC = 2). Free Cool Low Temp Limit (FC.LO) Unoccupied free cooling cannot occur if the Outdoor Air Temperature (TemperatureAIR.TOAT) is less than FC.LO. Power Exhaust To enable power exhaust, set Power Exhaust Installed (ConfigurationECONPE.EN) to YES. Both power exhaust fans are wired together and are controlled by the configuration Power Exhaust Stage1 CFM (ConfigurationECONPE1.C). When the Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (ConfigurationECON IDF.C) is set to the correct supply duct CFM (either by fan tables or air balance report) the control will calculate the outside air CFM based on outside air damper position and Commanded Fan Speed (OutputsFANSF.SPD) to turn on the power exhaust when the calculated outside air CFM reaches Power Exhaust Stage1 CFM (PE1.C). The power exhaust will then turn off when the calculated outside air CFM falls below Power Exhaust Stage1 CFM (PE1.C). The Power Exhaust Stage2 CFM (Configuration ECONPE2.C) is not currently used on the 48/50PD--05 and 06 units. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) The ComfortLinkt control has the capability for several methods of demand ventilation control. Indoor air quality is typically measured using a CO2 sensor whose measurements are displayed in parts per million (ppm). Outdoor air quality may be measured with a CO2 sensor for indoor--outdoor differential demand ventilation control, or with other sensor types for the outdoor air lockout function. The factory--installed indoor air quality CO2 sensor is mounted in the return section. A field--installed indoor air quality CO2 sensor may be mounted in the return or directly in the occupied space, per job requirements. The indoor air quality modes of operation can be affected by the IAQ Analog Input Config (ConfigurationAIR.QIA.CF), IAQ Switch Input Config (ConfigurationAIR.QII.CF), OAQ Analog Input Config (ConfigurationAIR.QOA.CF) and other related fan and limit configurations as described below. 21 48/50PD INCREASING VENTILATION IAQ (Analog Input) The ComfortLinkt control is configured for indoor air quality sensors which provide 4 to 20 mA signal for 0 to 2000 ppm CO2. If the sensor being used has a different range, the ppm display range must be reconfigured by entering new values for the IAQ Sensor Value at 4mA (ConfigurationAIR.QI.4M) and IAQ Sensor Value at 20mA (ConfigurationAIR.QI.20M). IA.CF = O (No IAQ) IA.CF = 0 signifies that there is no IAQ sensor installed. The damper will operate at the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (ConfigurationECONMP.MX) when the fan is at Supply Fan Maximum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MX) and the damper position will vary at other fan speeds as described in the Cooling Mode with Economizer section below when the space is occupied and the indoor fan is on. IA.CF = 1 (DCV) When IA.CF = 1, the IAQ algorithm is set for Demand Control Ventilation (DCV). During DCV, the damper modulates between two user configurations depending upon the relationship between the Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) and the Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ). The lower of these two positions is referred to as the Econo Min IAQ Position (ConfigurationAIR.QAQ.MN), while the higher is referred to as the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (ConfigurationECONMP.MX). The Econo Min IAQ Position (AQ.MN) should be set to an economizer position that brings in enough fresh air to remove contaminates and CO2 generated by sources other than people. The Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (MP.MX) should be set to an economizer position that brings in fresh air to remove contaminates and CO2 generated by all sources including people when the indoor fan is operating at the Supply Fan Maximum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MX). The Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (MP.MX) value is the design value for maximum occupancy. The ComfortLinkt control will begin to open the damper from the Econo Min IAQ Position (AQ.MN) position when the IAQ level begins to exceed the Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ) level by a configurable amount. This amount is referred to as AQ Differential Low (ConfigurationAIR.QAQD.L). When the differential between IAQ and OAQ reaches AQ Differential High (ConfigurationAIR.QAQD.H), the economizer position will be at the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (MP.MX) when the indoor fan speed is at Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX). When the IAQ/OAQ differential is between AQ Differential Low (AQD.L) and AQ Differential High (AQD.H), the control will modulate the damper between Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (MP.MX) and Econo Min IAQ Position (AQ.MN) in a linear manner as shown in Fig. 8. At other fan speeds the economizer damper will operate in the shaded area between the two economizer position curves but at the actual fan speed as indicated by Commanded Fan Speed (Outputs FANSF.SPD). (See Fig. 7.) ECON MIN AT MAX FANSPEED POSITION (MINP_MAX) VENTILATION FOR PEOPLE MINIMUM IAQ DAMPER POSITION (AQ. MN) VENTILATION FOR SOURCES 100 700 INSIDE/OUTSIDE CO2 DIFFERENTIAL AQ DIFFERENTIAL LOW (AQD.L) AQ DIFFERENTIAL HIGH (AQD.H) Fig. 8 -- Economizer Minimum Position C09145 IA.CF = 2 (Override IAQ) When IA.CF = 2, the IAQ algorithm maintains the damper at Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (ConfigurationECONMP.MX) when the indoor fan speed is at Supply Fan Maximum Speed (ConfigurationUNITFS.MX) or along the curve on Fig. 7 when the indoor fan speed is at the Commanded Fan Speed (OutputsFANSF.SPD) until the override condition triggers. The override triggers when the IAQ/OAQ differential is greater than AQ Differential High (ConfigurationAIR.QAQD.H). The IAQ Override Position (ConfigurationAIR.QOVR.P) sets the damper position during override. The economizer damper will return to the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (MP.MX) or MP.MX curve at other fan speeds when the IAQ/OAQ differential is less than the AQ Differential Low (ConfigurationAIR.QAQD.L). The override algorithm will operate whenever the building is occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Analog Fan Config (ConfigurationAIR.QIA.FN) determines whether or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the indoor fan is not operating, the economizer position will be zero. If the override is not active and the building is unoccupied, the economizer position will be zero. The damper position may exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (MP.MX) or IAQ Override Position (OVR.P) to provide economizer cooling. IA.CF = 3 (Control Minimum Position) When IA.CF = 3, an external 4 to 20 mA source is used to set the minimum position. The 4mA signal corresponds to 0% and the 20 mA signal corresponds to 100%. In this mode, configurations such as Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (ConfigurationECON MP.MX), Econo Min IAQ Position (ConfigurationAIR.Q AQ.MN) and the economizer minimum position and DCV minimum position curves in Fig. 7 and 8 are not used. If the indoor fan is not operating, the economizer position will be zero. The damper position may exceed the economizer minimum position to provide economizer cooling. 22 IAQ (Switch Input) Indoor air quality can also be measured using a switch input. For the purpose of specifying the type of switch input, low CO2 levels are considered normal. The IAQ switch input is defined by the IAQ Switch Input Config (ConfigurationAIR.QII.CF). Enthalpy and IAQ are controlled by the same switch input and therefore cannot be used simultaneously. II.CF = 0 (No IAQ) The II.CF = 0 configuration signifies that there is no IAQ switch input. The damper will operate at the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (ConfigurationECONMP.MX) and corresponding damper position curve based on indoor fan speed when the space is occupied and the indoor fan is on. II.CF = 1 (DCV Normally Open) or II.CF = 2 (DCV Normally Closed) The Demand Control Ventilation (DCV) allows the economizer minimum position to be decreased when there is no IAQ problem. If IAQ is low, the economizer minimum position is Econo Min IAQ Position (ConfigurationAIR.QAQ.MN) when the indoor fan is operating at Supply Fan Maximum Speed (Configuration UNITFS.MX). If IAQ is high, the economizer minimum position is Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (ConfigurationECON MP.MX) when the indoor fan is operating at Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX). If the fan speed is modulating, see Fig. 7 for higher or lower damper position setting at the specific fan speed. II.CF = 3 (Override Normally Open) or II.CF = 4 (Override Normally Closed) The damper override function permits absolute positioning of the economizer damper for ventilation purposes. The override is active when IAQ is high and inactive when IAQ is low. The override position is configured by the IAQ Override Position (ConfigurationAIR.QOVR.P). Outdoor Air Quality (Analog Input) The ComfortLinkt control can be configured for outdoor air quality sensors which provide a 4 to 20 mA signal corresponding to 0 to 2000 ppm CO2. If a field supplied sensor has a different range, the ppm display range must be reconfigured by entering new values for the OAQ Sensor Value at 4mA (ConfigurationAIR.Q O.4M) and OAQ Sensor Value at 20mA (Configuration AIR.QO.20M). OA.CF = 0 (No OAQ) This signifies that there is no outdoor air sensor installed. The default value of OAQ is 400 ppm CO2 when using demand control ventilation (DCV). OA.CF = 1 (DCV) The outdoor air quality sensor analog input is the value of OAQ for demand control ventilation (DCV). OA.CF = 2 (OAQ Lockout) The outdoor air quality analog input is only used to lock out the outdoor ventilation. The economizer commanded position is set to 0% when the CO2 ppm exceeds the OAQ lockout value configured for the OAQ Lockout Limit (ConfigurationAIR.Q OAQ.L). The default value for OAQ Lockout Limit (OAQ.L) is 600 ppm CO2. Fan Enable (Analog IAQ Sensor) The DCV algorithm will operate whenever the building is occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Analog Fan Config (ConfigurationAIR.QIA.FN) determines whether or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the indoor fan is not operating, the economizer position will be zero. The damper position may exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (ConfigurationECONMP.MX) and corresponding damper position curve to provide economizer cooling. IA.FN = 0 (Never) When IA.FN = 0, the IAQ algorithm can never turn on the fan. IA.FN = 1 (Occupied) When IA.FN =1, the IAQ algorithm will turn on the indoor fan whenever the building is occupied and IAQ/OAQ differential is greater than the Fan On AQ Differential (ConfigurationAIR.Q DF.ON). The indoor fan will turn off when the IAQ/OAQ differential is less than the Fan Off AQ Differential (Configuration AIR.QDF.OF). IA.FN = 2 (Always) The indoor fan operation for IA.FN = 2, is the same as the operation when IA.FN =1, except the algorithm is not limited to the occupied periods only. The fan can be triggered on when the space is occupied or unoccupied. Fan Enable (Switch Input) The DCV algorithm will operate whenever the building is occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Switch Fan Config (ConfigurationAIR.QII.FN) determines whether or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the indoor fan is not operating, the economizer position will be zero. The damper position may exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (ConfigurationECONMP.MX) and corresponding damper position curve to provide economizer cooling. II.FN = 0 (Never) When the II.FN = 0, the IAQ algorithm can never turn on fan. II.FN = 1 (Occupied) When II.FN =1, the IAQ algorithm will turn on the indoor fan whenever the building is occupied and IAQ is high. The indoor fan will turn off when the IAQ returns to normal. II.FN = 2 (Always) The indoor fan operation for II.FN =2 is the same as the operation when IA.FN =1, except the algorithm is not limited to the occupied periods only. The fan can be triggered on when the space is occupied or unoccupied. Temperature Compensated Start This logic is used when the unit is in the unoccupied state. The control will calculate early Start Bias time based on Space Temperature deviation from the occupied cooling and heating set points. This will allow the control to start the unit so that the space is at conditioned levels when the occupied period starts. This is required for ASHRAE 90.1 compliance. Setting Up the System The settings for temperature compensated start can be found in the local display under ConfigurationUNIT. ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT TCS.C Temp.Cmp.Strt.Cool Factr 0 --- 60 min TCSTCOOL TCS.H Temp.Cmp.Strt.Heat Factr 0 --- 60 min TCSTHEAT Temp Comp Strt Cool Factr (TCS.C) This is the factor for the start time bias equation for cooling. Temp Comp Strt Heat Factr (TCS.H) This is the factor for the start time bias equation for heating. NOTE: Temperature compensated start is disabled when these factors are set to 0. 23 48/50PD 48/50PD Temperature Compensated Start Logic The following conditions must be met for the algorithm to run: S Unit is in unoccupied state. S Next occupied time is valid. S Current time of day is valid. S Valid space temperature reading is available (sensor or CCN network). The algorithm will calculate a Start Bias time in minutes using the following equations: If (space temperature > occupied cooling set point) Start Bias Time = (space temperature -- occupied cooling set point)*TCS.C If (space temperature < occupied heating set point) Start Bias Time = (occupied heating set point -- space temperature)*TCS.H When the Start Bias Time is greater than zero the algorithm will subtract it from the next occupied time to calculate the new start time. When the new start time is reached, the Temperature Compensated Start mode is set, the fan is started and the unit controlled as in an occupied state. Once set, Temperature Compensated mode will stay on until the unit goes into the Occupied mode. The Start Bias Time will be written into the CCN Linkage Equipment Table if the unit is controlled in DAV mode. If the Unoccupied Economizer Free Cool mode is active when temperature compensated start begins, the Unoccupied Free Cool mode will be stopped. IMPORTANT: The maximum minutes Start Bias can be is 180. Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)R Configuration It is possible to configure the ComfortLinkTM control to participate as an element of the Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) system directly from the local display. This section will deal with explaining the various programmable options which are found under the CCN sub-menu in the Configuration mode. The major configurations for CCN programming are located in the local displays at ConfigurationCCN. See Appendix A. CCN Address (CCN.A) This configuration is the CCN address the rooftop is assigned. CCN Address (CCN.B) This configuration is the CCN bus the rooftop is assigned. CCN Baud Rate (BAUD) This configuration is the CCN baud rate. CCN Time/Date Broadcast (BRODB.TIM) If this configuration is set to ON, the control will periodically send the time and date out onto the CCN bus once a minute. If this device is on a CCN network then it will be important to make sure that only one device on the bus has this configuration set to ON. If more than one time broadcaster is present, problems with the time will occur. IMPORTANT: Only the time and date broadcaster can perform daylight savings time adjustments. Even if the rooftop is stand alone, the user may want to set this to ON to accomplish the daylight/savings function. CCN OAT Broadcast (BRODB.OAT) If this configuration is set to ON, the control will periodically broadcast its outside-air temperature at a rate of once every 30 minutes. Global Schedule Broadcast (BRODB.GS) If this configuration is set to ON and the schedule number (SCH.N) is between 65 and 99, then the control will broadcast the internal time schedule once every 2 minutes. CCN Broadcast Acknowledger (BRODB.ACK) If this configuration is set to ON, then when any broadcasting is done on the bus, this device will respond to and acknowledge. Only one device per bus can be configured for this option. Schedule Number (SCH.OSCH.N) This configuration determines what schedule the control may follow. SCH.N = 0 SCH.N = 1 SCH.N = 65- 99 The control is always occupied. The control follows its internal time schedules. The user may enter any number between 1 and 64 but it will be overwritten to "1" by the control as it only has one internal schedule. The control is either set up to receive to a broadcasted time schedule set to this number or the control is set up to broadcast its internal time schedule (B.GS) to the network and this is the global schedule number it is broadcasting. If this is the case, then the control still follows its internal time schedules. Accept Global Holidays? (SCH.OHOL.G) If a device is broadcasting the time on the bus, it is possible to accept the time yet not accept the global holiday from the broadcast message. Override Time Limit (SCH.OOV.TL) This configuration allows the user to decide how long an override occurs when it is initiated. The override may be configured from 1 to 4 hours. If the time is set to 0, the override function will become disabled. Timed Override Hours (SCH.OOV.EX) This displays the current number of hours left in an override. It is possible to cancel an override in progress by writing "0" to this variable, thereby removing the override time left. SPT Override Enabled? (SCH.OOV.SP) If a space sensor is present, then it is possible to override an unoccupied period by pushing the override button on the T55 or T56 sensor. This option allows the user to disable this function by setting this configuration to NO. Demand Limit Demand Limit Control may override the cooling algorithm to limit or reduce cooling capacity during run time. The term Demand Limit Control refers to the restriction of machine capacity to control the amount of power that a machine will use. This can save the owner money by limiting peaks in the power supply. Demand limit control is intended to interface with an external network system. This is through a CCN Loadshed POC Device or writing to network points. To limit stages through network writes, the points Run Status COOLMAX.C and Run StatusHEATMAX.H are forced on the network through CCN points MAX_CAPC and MAXHSTGS respectively. Force these to the desired maximum cooling/dehumidification capacity and the maximum heating stages, respectively. When there is no force on these points, they automatically reset to allow full cooling/dehumidification capacity and all heating stages to be used. These points are reset at power--on/reset (POR). When using the Loadshed POC to do Demand Limiting, the cool capacity and heat stage limits under both Redline and Loadshed conditions can be set individually with configuration decisions. If the active stages are greater then the loadshed or redline configurations when a loadshed or redline command is given, the unit will reduce capacity or remove stages. The configuration points can be found in ConfigurationCCNLDS. 24 48/50PD Loadshed Group Number (S.GRP) This corresponds to the loadshed supervisory devices that reside elsewhere on the CCN network and broadcast loadshed and redline commands to its associated equipment parts. This variable will default to zero which is an invalid group number. This allows the loadshed function to be disabled until configured. Redline Max Capacity (R.MXC) This configuration tells the unit the maximum cooling/dehumidification capacity allowed active during a redline condition. Loadshed Max Capacity This configuration tells the unit the maximum cooling/dehumidification capacity allowed active during a loadshed condition. Redline Max Heat Stages (R.MXH) This configuration tells the unit the maximum heating stages allowed to be on during a redline condition. Loadshed Max Heat Stages (R.MXH) This configuration tells the unit the maximum heating stages allowed to be on during a loadshed condition. The two Demand Limiting methods can be active simultaneously. The lowest cool capacity and heat stage limits imposed by either method are applied, and these "effective limits" are shown in the points CAPLIMIT (Run StatusCOOLLMT.C) and HSTGLIMT (Run StatusHEATLMT.H), respectively. In normal running mode, these limits will prevent capacity/stages from being added, or capacity/stages to be removed, as applicable. In test mode, these limits are ignored, and the user may continue to operate at full load. The point MODEDMDL (Run StatusMODED.LMT) is used to show if any Demand Limiting is in effect that prevents the unit from operating either cooling or heating at full--capacity. IMPORTANT: MODEDMDL may reflect that staging is NOT limited even though Loadshed is active or the network points are being forced, if the capacity/stage limits in effect are not less than the capacity/stages present in the unit. If a more drastic mode of Demand Limiting is required, the network point HVACDOWN (Run StatusMODEHV.DN) can be used to prohibit the unit from selecting any HVAC mode, thus preventing the operation of the supply fan, compressors, condenser fans, and heat stages. This point must also be forced, and is reset automatically when not forced, and at POR. A force on this point will shutdown the unit and disable operation until removed. Alarm Handling There are a variety of different alerts and alarms in the system. Alerts are indicated by TXXX (where XXX is the alert number) on the display and generally signify that the improperly functioning circuit can restart without human interaction. If an alarm occurs, indicated by AXXX (where XXX is the alarm number), the damaged circuit will generally not restart without an alarm reset via the Scrolling Marquee display or CCN. The response of the control system to various alerts and alarms depends on the seriousness of the particular alert or alarm. In the mildest case, an alert does not affect the operation of the unit in any manner. An alert can also cause a "strike." A "striking" alert will cause the circuit to shut down for 15 minutes. This feature reduces the likelihood of false alarms causing a properly working system to be shut down incorrectly. If three strikes occur before the circuit has an opportunity to show that it can function properly, the circuit will strike out, causing the shutdown alarm for that particular circuit. Once activated, the shutdown alarm can only be cleared via an alarm reset. However, circuits with strikes will be given an opportunity to reset their strike counter to zero. As discussed above, a strike typically causes the circuit to shut down. Fifteen minutes later, that circuit will once again be allowed to run. If the circuit is able to run for 1 minute, its replacement circuit will be allowed to shut down (if not required to run to satisfy requested stages). However, the "troubled" circuit must run continuously for a user defined time (ConfigurationCOOLRST.C) with no detectable problems before the strike counter will be reset to zero. Default value is 5 minutes. CCN Alarm Broadcast Operators of CCN networks might not want to be notified of "striking" alerts for refrigerant circuits until the circuit has been shut down due to 3 strikes. Set the cooling configuration of Alert Each Strike (ConfigurationCOOLALM.N on display, ALM_NOW on CCN) to YES to broadcast each circuit strike alert. Set Alert Each Strike to NO to broadcast only circuit shut down. Alert Each Strike configuration is ignored during Service Test and all alerts are broadcast. Alarm Relay Output The alarm relay output is a normally open 24 vac output between field connection terminal board terminals C and X. Selection of which alerts and alarms will result in closing of the alarm relay may be set in the Alarm Relay Configuration (ConfigurationALM.O). Setting a configuration to YES will result in the alarm output relay, ALRM, status of ON and 24 vac between C and X when that particular condition is in an alarm state. Setting a configuration to NO will result in no action by the alarm output relay for that particular condition. IMPORTANT: An accessory filter switch can be used along with the alarm relay output function to indicate dirty filter service need. See the Troubleshooting section for more information on viewing, diagnosing, and clearing alerts and alarms. TROUBLESHOOTING The Scrolling Marquee display shows the actual operating conditions of the unit while it is running. If there are alarms or there have been alarms, they will be displayed in either the current alarm list or the history alarm list. (See Table 7.) The Service Test mode allows proper operation of the compressors, fans, and other components to be checked while the unit is not operating. See Service Test. Complete Unit Stoppage There are several conditions that can cause the unit not to provide heating or cooling: S If an alarm is active which causes the unit to shut down, diagnose the problem using the information provided in Alarms and Alerts section below. S Cooling and heating loads are satisfied. S Programmed occupancy schedule. S General power failure. S Tripped CB1 or CB2 (24-volt transformer circuit breakers). S Unit is turned off through the CCN network. S If outdoor-air temperature is less than the Compressor Lockout Temperature (CA.LO) configuration value, unit cannot cool. S If outdoor-air temperature is greater than the Heating Lockout Temperature (HT.LO) configuration value, unit cannot heat. 25 48/50PD Restart Procedure Before attempting to restart the machine, check the alarm list to determine the cause of the shut down. If the shutdown alarm for a particular control function has occurred, determine and correct the cause before allowing the unit to run under its own control again. When there is problem, the unit should be diagnosed in Service Test mode. The alarms must be reset before the control function can operate in either Normal mode or Service Test mode. Alarms and Alerts Viewing and Clearing Unit Alarms Presence of active alarms will be indicated on the Scrolling Marquee display by the Alarm Status light turning on and by the number of active alarms being displayed in the automatic View of Run Status. Presence of active alarms may also be signaled on the Alarm Output terminals. Each alarm may also be broadcast on the CCN network. Active alarms and past alarm history can be reviewed and cleared via the local display or a CCN device. A quick reference table for alarms is shown in Table 7. The following menu locations are used for the local display: AlarmsR.CURR (Reset All Current Alarms) Change to YES to reset all active alarms. Turning unit power off will also reset all current alarms. AlarmsR.HIST (Reset Alarm History) Change to YES to reset the alarm history. Turning unit power off will not reset the alarm history. AlarmsCURR (Currently Active Alarms) Use the ENTER key, then scroll through any alarm numbers using the up and down arrow keys. Alarms are displayed in numerical order. AlarmsHIST (Alarm History) Use the ENTER key, then scroll through any alarm numbers using the up and down arrow keys. Up to 20 alarms are displayed in order of occurrence, with time and date. The description for an alarm can be viewed on the Scrolling Marquee display by pressing ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously while displaying the alarm code number. Be sure to expand description for each code, because in some cases there are different possible descriptions and causes for the same code number. Diagnostic Alarm Codes and Possible Causes Alert Code T051 There are 5 different texts for this alert code. There are three different alerts, two of which have corresponding test mode alerts indicated with "Service Test" in the expanded text. Pressing enter and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T051 alert will show you one of the below alerts. Make sure the expanded text is read correctly before troubleshooting. S Digital Compressor Control Board Alarm This alert occurs when the Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) energizes its alarm relay. Refer to the DSC's LED diagnostic to determine which of the nine codes are present. Power cycle will clear the DSC's LED code. When the DSC's alarm clears, this alert will automatically clear. S Compressor A1 Safety Trip This Alert indicates that Current Sensing A1 (CS.A1) has been enabled. The unit does not support the use of a current sensor at this time. Change the CS.A1 to disable and this alert will clear and not return. (ConfigurationCOOLCS.A1) S Compressor A1 Current Detected After Turnoff This Alert indicates that Current Sensing A1 (CS.A1) has been enabled. The unit does not support the use of a current sensor at this time. Change the CS.A1 to disable and this alert will clear and not return. (ConfigurationCOOLCS.A1) Alert Code T064 -- Circuit A Saturated Condensing Temperature Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range --40_ to 240_F (--40_ to 116_C). When this occurs, the control will use only the outdoor temperature to control the outdoor fans. If both the SCT and OAT fail, then circuit shutdown alarm will occur also. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T066 -- Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the unit's suction transducers are turned off internally. Cooling will not operate. This is usually due to a network force on a non exposed CCN point. Reload factory defaults or reinstall software on the MBB. Consult the network manager if alert continues. Alert Code T073 -- Outdoor Air Temperature Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range --40_ to 240_F (--40_ to 116_C). For all units, all ambient temperature lockout limits for cooling and heating are ignored. For all units, if both SCT and OAT fail, then circuit shutdown alarm will also occur. For economizer equipped units, the economizer will not operate to provide cooling. The economizer will still operate for ventilation. The control will use condenser temperatures for outdoor fan control. For units with CCH crankcase heat relay control, the crankcase heat relay will be turned on if any compressor is off. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T074 -- Space Temperature Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range --40_ to 240_F (--40_ to 116_C). Cooling and heating will not operate. For economizer equipped units, the economizer will still operate for ventilation. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor in the T--55, T--56, or T--58 device, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T075 -- Supply Air Temperature Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range --40_ to 240_F (--40_ to 116_C). Economizer cooling and compressor operation cannot occur while this alert is active. The unit will not be allowed to enter cooling mode. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T076 -- Return Air Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range --40_ to 240_F (--40_ to 116_C). Differential dry bulb crossover control can not occur. Free cooling can only be controlled by the OAT and enthalpy. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T077 -- Space Relative Humidity Sensor Failure This alert occurs when the input is less than 3.5 mA and the sensor is configured as installed. If a humidistat is not installed, then dehumidification will not be functional. Check sensor and wiring. This alert clears automatically. NOTE: An ECB must be installed to use the space relative humidity sensor. 26 48/50PD Alert Code T092 -- Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure This alert occurs when the board does not properly read the transducer voltage. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use the Scrolling Marquee to reset the alarm. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5--v power supply, or a loose connection. Alert Code T102 -- Compressor A1 Current Sensor Failure This Alert indicates that Current Sensing A1 (CS.A1) has been enabled. The unit does not support the use of a current sensor at this time. Change the CS.A1 to disable and this alert will clear and not return. (ConfigurationCOOLCS.A1) Alert Code T110 -- Circuit A Loss of Charge This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert occurred during service test. This alert occurs when the compressor is OFF and the suction pressure is less than 5 psig and OAT is greater than --5_F for 1 continuous minute. Use the Scrolling Marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant pressure or a faulty suction pressure. This alert only occurs when the compressor is OFF because the low refrigerant pressure alarms (alert T133) handle this situation when the compressor is operating. Alert Code T126 -- Circuit A High Discharge Pressure This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert occurred during service test. This alert occurs when alert T051 is active while the appropriate condensing temperature is greater than 150_F. This alert reset automatically. The cause of the alert is usually an overcharged system, high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged filter drier, or a faulty high--pressure switch. See Alert T051 for diagnostic procedure. Alert Code T133 -- Circuit A Low Refrigerant Pressure This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert occurred during service test. This alert occurs when the compressor is operating and the evaporating temperature (converted from the suction pressure) is less than configured low suction control levels, ConfigurationCOOLSSTSST.1 (Low Suction - Level 1) or SST.2 (Low Suction - Level 2) or SST.3 (Low Suction Level 3). The circuit SST value must be less than SST.1 (for 5 minutes), SST.2 (for 4 minutes), or SST.3 (for 3 minutes when using the economizer and 1.5 minutes when not using the economizer) for the alert to occur. When the outdoor temperature is less than 40_F, the above values are reduced 1_F for every 2_F the OAT is below 40_F. An alert will also occur if the circuit SST value is less than SST.3 --5_F for 20 seconds and the outdoor temperature is above 40_F. All the above timers will reset if the suction temperature rises above SST.O for 1 minute. This alert causes a strike for the respective circuit. If the OAT is less than 10_F, the circuit will shut down without a strike. This alert will activate when the coil becomes frosted. However, during the 15--minute reset period, the coils will thaw and strike should clear and restart if there is nothing else wrong with the circuit. The alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan operating backwards, loose or broken belt, plugged filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient temperature is low. Alert Code T143 -- Circuit A Failure to Pressurize This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert occurred during service test. This alert occurs when the compressor turns on and the difference between suction and discharge pressure is less then the Ckt A Minimum Pressure (ConfigurationCOOLSSTPSI.D). The pressure difference must be greater then PSI.D (default is 20 psi) after 60 seconds and stay above it while running the compressor. This alert causes a strike for the respective circuit. The alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually compressor wiring causing reverse rotation or a faulty compressor. Alert Code T153 -- Real Time Clock Hardware Failure This alert occurs when the RTC clock chip on the MBB is not responding. Time and date functions will not operate, such as local occupancy schedules. The unit will default to 24/7 unoccupied mode. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the control and reconfiguring the time and date should be tried before board replacement. Alarm Code A154 -- Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure The unit will completely shut down. The serial EEPROM chip on the MBB, which stores the unit's configuration, is not responding. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling the power to the control should be tried before board replacement. Alarm Code T155 -- Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error Configuration data in the serial EEPROM chip can not be verified. The unit will run to last know good values or defaults, and therefore operating errors may occur. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the control and reconfiguring the control points should be tried before board replacement. Alarm Code A156 -- Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Fail Error The unit will completely shut down. Critical configuration data in the serial EEPROM chip can not be verified. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the control and reconfiguring the critical control points should be tried before board replacement. There are no critical configurations in the 48/50PD. Alert Code A157 -- A/D Hardware Failure The unit will completely shut down. The analog to digital conversion chip on the MBB has failed. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the control should be tried before board replacement. Alert Code A163 -- Circuit A Down Due to Failure This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert occurred during service test. This alarm occurs when a circuit has 3 strikes. Use the Scrolling Marquee display to reset the alarm. Investigate the alarm that caused the strikes to occur. Alert Code T178 -- Loss of Communication with the Capacity Control Board This alert occurs when the MBB cannot communicate with the AUX1 board. Unit operation will be disabled. This is usually caused by a wiring problem. Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, check that the AUX1 address is correct, and verify the resistance between pins on the LEN connections. 27 48/50PD Alert Code T179 -- Loss of Communication with the Economizer Control Board This alert occurs when the MBB cannot communicate with the ECB. Economizer operation will be disabled. This is usually caused by a wiring problem. If a relative humidity sensor is installed and configured but there is not an ECB installed on the unit, this alert will be generated (the ECB is required for RH sensor operation). Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, check that the ECB address is correct, and verify the resistance between pins on the LEN connections. Alert Code T180 -- Loss of Communication with the Economizer Actuator This alert occurs when the ECB cannot communicate with the Belimo Actuator. If the analog signal is connected properly, the economizer can still be controlled through it. This is usually caused by a wiring problem, actuator failure, or the wrong actuator. Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, make sure the actuator is a MFT communication actuator, and verify the feedback signal from the actuator is correct. Alarm Code A200 -- Linkage Timeout -- Comm Failure This alarm occurs when the MBB fails to communicate with a Linkage device. This only occurs when the MBB has previously communicated with a Linkage device since last power cycle. If a back up sensor was not installed the T074 alert will occur shortly after this one. Reset power to the unit and verify Linkage is communicating. Alarm Code A404 -- Fire Shutdown This alarm occurs when the shutdown input is either open or closed depending upon its configuration. This alarm is usually caused by an auxiliary device that is trying to shut down the unit, e.g., smoke detector. The configuration for this switch input can be found at variable ConfigurationUNITFS.SW. Verify that the configuration is set correct, verify the wiring and auxiliary device. This alarm resets automatically. Alert Code T408 -- Dirty Air Filter This alert occurs when the Filter Status switch senses a plugged filter for 120 continuous seconds after the indoor fan has been running for 10 seconds. Because the Dirty Air Filter switch can be configured normally opened or closed, the switch might be open or closed. The configuration for this switch input can be found at variable ConfigurationUNITFL.SW. Verify that the configuration is set correct and verify the wiring and filter status switch. The hose should be connected to the low side of the switch. This alert resets automatically. Alert Code T409 There are 2 different texts for this alert code. Pressing enter and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T409 alert will show you one of the below alerts. Make sure the expanded text is read correctly before troubleshooting. S Fan Status Switch On, Fan Contactor Off This alarm occurs when the fan status switch has sensed that the indoor fan has been on for 10 seconds and the indoor fan feedback has determined that the indoor fan should be off. Because the Fan Status switch can be configured normally opened or closed, the switch might be open or closed. The configuration for this switch input can be found at ConfigurationUNITFN.SW. Verify that the configuration is set correctly. Verify the wiring and fan status switch. The hose should be connected to the high side of the switch. If the IDF is configured to shut down the unit when this alarm occurs (ConfigurationUNITIDF.F = YES), then this alarm can only be reset manually and the unit is shut down. If the IDF is not configured to shut the unit down when this alarm occurs (IDF.F = NO), then this alarm resets automatically and no specific control action is taken. S Fan Status Switch Off, Fan Contactor On This alert occurs when the fan status switch has sensed that the indoor fan has been off for 10 seconds and the indoor fan feedback has determined that the indoor fan should be on. Because the Fan Status switch can be configured normally opened or closed, the switch might be open or closed. The configuration for this switch input can be found at ConfigurationUNITFN.SW. Verify that the configuration is set correctly. Verify the wiring and fan status switch. The hose should be connected to the high side of the switch. If the IDF is configured to shut down the unit down when this alert occurs (ConfigurationUNITIDF.F = YES), then this alarm can only be reset manually and the unit is shut down. If the IDF is not configured to shut the unit down when this alert occurs (IDF.F = NO), then this alert resets automatically and no specific control action is taken. 28 Alert Code T414 There are 6 different alerts under this one alert code. Pressing enter and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T414 alert will show you one of the below alerts. All these alerts are generated by the Belimo actuator and reported to the ECB. These alerts can only occur if the ECB is controlling the actuator digitally through MFT. S Economizer Damper Actuator Out of Calibration This alert occurs when the economizer actuator reports a control angle (Operating ModesECONC.ANG) less than the minimum control angle (ConfigurationECONM.ANG). Initiate economizer calibration (Service TestINDP E.CAL) using the Service Test menu. The economizer calibration procedure will try to find new maximum open and closed positions. If the alert does not clear automatically after the calibration procedure is complete, investigate what is limiting economizer rotation. After that step, run another calibration, but first power off unit (spring return the damper), loosen the actuator clamp, and while pushing the damper closed tighten the clamp. This alert resets automatically. S Economizer Damper Actuator Torque Above Load Limit This alert occurs when the actuator load is too high. Investigate to determine what is increasing damper load and verify that the actuator is the correct size for the unit. This alert resets automatically. S Economizer Damper Actuator Hunting Excessively This alert occurs when the commanded damper position is changing too rapidly. The stop jog ratio must be less than 21% to clear this alert. Leave the actuator powered with no signal for a few hours to allow the ratio to decrease (may have to wait longer than a few hours). If the alert continues, determine if the ECB or actuator is bad. This alert resets automatically. S Economizer Damper Stuck or Jammed This alarm occurs when the actuator senses it can no longer move. Investigate what is stopping the rotation of the actuator and fix. This alert resets automatically. S Economizer Damper Actuator Mechanical Failure This alert occurs when the actuator senses a catastrophic failure. Investigate actuator and replace if necessary. This alert resets automatically. S Economizer Damper Actuator Direction Switch Wrong Position This alert occurs when the economizer damper direction switch is in the wrong position. The direction switch should be in the clockwise position and the actuator should be mounted so that the CW face of the actuator is accessible. Correct if necessary. This alert clears automatically. Alert Code T415 -- IAQ Input Out of Range This alert occurs when the IAQ input (on ECB) is less than 3.5 mA and the sensor is configured as installed. IAQ operation will be disabled. Check sensor and wiring. This alert clears automatically. Alert Code T416 -- OAQ Input Out of Range This alert occurs when the OAQ input (on ECB) is less than 3.5 mA and the sensor is configured as installed. OAQ operation will be disabled. Check sensor and wiring. This alert clears automatically. 48/50PD 29 48/50PD Table 7 ComfortLinkTM Alarm Codes ALARM OR ALERT NUMBER T051 T064 T066 T073 T074 T075 T076 T077 T092 T102 T110 T126 DESCRIPTION Digital Compressor Control Board Alarm Compressor A1 Safety Trip Service Test --- Compressor A1 Safety Trip Compressor A1 Current Detected After Turnoff Service Test --- Compressor A1 Current Detected After Turnoff Circuit A Saturated Condensing Temp Thermistor Failure Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature Thermistor Failure Outdoor Air Temperature Thermistor Failure Space Temperature Thermistor Failure Supply Air Temperature Thermistor Failure Return Air Thermistor Failure Space Relative Humidity Sensor Failure Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure Compressor A1 Current Sensor Failure Circuit A Loss of Charge Service Test --- Circuit A Loss of Charge Circuit A High Discharge Pressure Service Test --- Circuit A High Discharge Pressure T133 Circuit A Low Refrigerant Pressure Service Test --- Circuit A Low Refrigerant Pressure T143 T153 A154 T155 A156 A157 A163 T178 T179 T180 A200 A404 T408 Circuit A Failure To Pressurize Service Test --- Circuit A Failure To Pressurize Real Timeclock Hardware Failure Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Fail Error A/D Hardware Failure Circuit A Down Due to Failure Service Test --- Circuit A Down Due to Failure Loss of Communication with the Capacity Control Board Loss of communication with the Economizer Control Board Loss of communication with the Economizer Actuator Linkage Timeout Error --- Comm Failure Fire Shutdown Dirty Filter T409 Fan Status Switch ON, Fan Contactor OFF Fan Status Switch OFF, Fan Contactor ON T414 T415 T416 Economizer Damper Actuator Out of Calibration Economizer Damper Actuator Torque Above Load Limit Economizer Damper Actuator Hunting Excessively Economizer Damper Stuck or Jammed Economizer Damper Actuator Mechanical Failure Economizer Damper Actuator Direction Switch Wrong IAQ Input Out of Range OAQ Input Out of Range LEGEND ECB --- Economizer Control Board IGC --- Integrated Gas Controller MBB --- Main Base Board OAT --- Outdoor ---Air Thermistor ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL No action Add Strike for Circuit A Add Strike for Circuit A Turn off all compressors Turn off all compressors Use OAT to control Outdoor fans No Cooling No cooling with economizer No heating or cooling No cooling mode No differential DB crossover If RH.S = Yes, then no indoor humidity control Shutdown Circuit A If CS.A1 = Enable, then no T051 current alarm Shutdown Circuit A Shutdown Circuit A Shutdown Circuit A Shutdown Circuit A Add Strike for Circuit A Add Strike for Circuit A Add Strike for Circuit A Add Strike for Circuit A No time and date schedule operation Unit Shutdown Unit operation errors Unit Shutdown Unit Shutdown Shutdown Circuit A Shutdown Circuit A Unit shutdown --- HVAC disable No economizer operation No economizer operation No Linkage Operation fall back to local SPT Unit Shutdown Alert Generated If IDF.F = Yes, then Unit Shutdown If IDF.F = Yes, then Unit Shutdown Alert Generated Alert Generated Alert Generated Alert Generated Alert Generated Alert Generated No IAQ Operations No OAQ Operations RESET METHOD Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic If IDF.F = YES, then Manual, otherwise automatic If IDF.F = YES, then Manual, otherwise automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic PROBABLE CAUSE See the DSC's LEDs for troubleshooting Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and should be off Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and should be off Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and should be off Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and should be off Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring error or loose connection. Suction transducers internally forced inactive Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring error or loose connection. Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring error or loose connection. Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring error or loose connection. Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring error or loose connection. Faulty, shorted, or open sensor caused by wiring error or loose connection. Faulty transducer, faulty 5--- V power supply, or loose connection Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and should be off Low refrigerant or faulty suction pressure transducer Low refrigerant or faulty suction pressure transducer An overcharged system, high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged filter drier, or a faulty high--- pressure switch. An overcharged system, high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged filter drier, or a faulty high--- pressure switch. Low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan turning backwards, loose or broken fan belt, plugged filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient temperature is low. Low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan turning backwards, loose or broken fan belt, plugged filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient temperature is low. Wiring causing reverse rotation or faulty compressor Wiring causing reverse rotation or faulty compressor No time/date configured, software failure, or MBB failure Software failure or MBB failure Software failure or MBB failure Software failure or MBB failure Software failure or MBB failure Circuit has 3 strikes or has been locked out by another alarm Circuit has 1 strike or has been locked out by another alarm Communication wiring problem with AUX1 or faulty MBB, ECB, or AUX1 Communication wiring problem with ECB or faulty MBB, ECB, or AUX1 Communication wiring problem with actuator. Received a table write from Linkage before, now not receiving any linked commands Smoke detected by smoke detector Dirty Filter Bad Fan Status Switch. Configuration incorrect. Tripped Circuit Breaker. Broken belt. Bad indoor fan motor. Configuration incorrect. Bad fan status switch. Calibrate economizer (E.CAL). If problem still exist then determine what is limiting economizer rotation. Actuator load too high. Check damper load. Damper position changing too quickly. No economizer motion. Check damper blades, gears, and actuator. Check actuator and replace if necessary. Actuator direction control switch (CCW, CW) wrong. Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly. Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly. 30 48/50PD Table 8 LEN and CCN Communication Resistances Device MBB ECB AUX1 Board Serial Number Prior to 4702N Starting 4702N Prior to 0803N Starting 0803N --- (LEN) Resistance between Pins/ Connector Pins 1 to 3 Pins 1 to 2 Pins 2 to 3 15K 7.5K 7.5K J3, J4, & J5 J3, J4, & J5 J3, J4, & J5 18.9K 9.9K 9.9K J3, J4, & J5 J3, J4, & J5 J3, J4, & J5 5.9K 5.2K 5K J2 J2 J2 18.9K 9.9K 9.9K J2 J2 J2 29K 16K 13.5K J9 J9 J9 (CCN) Resistance between Pins/ Connector Pins 5 to 7 Pins 5 to 6 Pins 6 to 7 15K J5 7.5K J5 7.5K J5 18.9K J5 9.9K J5 9.9K J5 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Control Module Communication Red LED Proper operation of the MBB, ECB and AUX1 control boards can be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs. When operating correctly, the red status LEDs should blink in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. If the red LED on the ECB and AUX1 is not blinking, check the DIP switch positions on the board. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify that correct power is being supplied to all modules. A blinking red LED at the rate of once per second means that software is not loaded on the board. Also, be sure that the board is supplied with the current software. If necessary, reload current software. A board LED that is lit continuously should be replaced. Green LED The MBB, ECB and AUX1 each have one green LED. The Local Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking whenever power is on. If LEN LED is not blinking, check LEN connections for potential communication errors (MBB J3, J4, and J5). Communication between modules is accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module. The J4 connector on the MBB also provides both power and communication directly to the Scrolling Marquee display. The J5 connector on the MBB provides a LEN interface at the field connection terminal (TB). Yellow LED The MBB has one yellow LED which is used to indicate CCN communication activity. The Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) LED will blink during times of network communication. Communication Failures If the Scrolling Marquee or Navigator display Communication Failure or the green or yellow LED's do not flash on the boards then the problem could be the communication chip on one of the control boards (MBB, ECB or AUX1). Use an ohm meter to measure the resistance on the communication pins of the boards to determine if the board is bad. If the reading is less than half the value indicated in Table 8, then the board needs to be replaced. IMPORTANT: The resistive values should be read when the board is powered off and the unit is locked out. Cooling Troubleshooting Use the Scrolling Marquee display or a CCN device to view the cooling status display and the cooling diagnostic display (see Appendix A) for information on the cooling operation. Check the current alarms and alarm history for any cooling alarm codes and correct any causes. (See Table 9.) Verify any unique control configurations per installed site requirements or accessories. If alarms conditions are corrected and cleared, operation of the compressors and fans may be verified by using the Service Test mode. (See Table 5.) See Table 9 for general cooling service analysis. 31 48/50PD Table 9 Cooling Service Analysis PROBLEM Compressor and Fan Will Not Start CAUSE Power failure. Fuse blown or circuit breaker tripped. Check CB1 and CB2. Disconnect off. Compressor time guard to prevent short cycling. Occupancy schedule set point or supply set point not calling for Cooling. Outdoor temperature too low. Active alarm. Compressor Cycles (other than normally satisfying demand). Insufficient line voltage. Active alarm. Compressor Operates Continuously. Unit undersized for load. Occupancy schedule set point or supply set point too low. Compressor running at lowest capacity Compressor contactor stuck on Dirty air filters. Low refrigerant charge. Excessive Condenser Pressures. Condenser coil dirty or restricted. Loose condenser thermistors. Dirty condenser coil. Refrigerant overcharge. Faulty TXV. Condenser Fans Not Operating. Excessive Suction Pressure. Condenser air restricted or air short cycling. Restriction in liquid tube. No Power to contactors. High heat load. Faulty TXV. Suction Pressure Too Low. Refrigerant overcharged. Dirty air filters. Low refrigerant charge. Faulty TXV. Insufficient evaporator airflow. Indoor Fan Running to slow or off while compressor is on LEGEND CB -- Circuit Breaker DSC -- Digital Scroll Controller TXV -- Thermostatic Expansion Valve VFD -- Variable Frequency Drive Temperature too low in conditioned area (low return --- air temperature). REMEDY Call power company. Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker. Power disconnect. Check time guards using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee also the DSC has a 2 minute anti --- short time Check cooling demand using ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee. Check Compressor Lockout Temperature using ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee. Check active alarms using ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee and DSC alert flash codes Determine cause and correct. Check active alarms using ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee and DSC alert flash codes Decrease load or increase size of unit. Check and adjust set points if needed. Check cooling demand using ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee and DSC alert flash codes. Replace filters. Check pressure, locate leak, repair, evacuate, and recharge. Clean coil or remove restriction. Tighten thermistors. Clean coil. Recover excess refrigerant. 1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction line and insulate. 2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed. Determine cause and correct. Remove restriction. Fuse blown or plug at motor loose. Check for sources and eliminate 1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction line and insulate. 2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed. Recover excess refrigerant. Replace air filters. Check pressure, locate leak, repair, evacuate, and recharge. 1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction line and insulate. 2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed. Check belt tension. Check for other restrictions. Check VFD display is illuminated and shows Auto mode. Power supplied to VFD. Check 0--- 10vdc signal present at AUX1 board. Reset thermostat or occupancy schedule. Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) Troubleshooting The 48/50PD units are equipped with a digital scroll compressor. The compressor has a solenoid unloader that is controlled by the digital scroll controller (DSC). This DSC turns the unloader on and off within a 20 second window. The amount of time the unloader is on verses off within that 20 seconds depends on the desired capacity. This means that the ComfortLink control does not have direct control of the compressor, but it does however control the power to the DSC and the signal for commanded capacity. The DSC has three LED lights to help during troubleshooting; green, yellow, and red. The DSC will run the compressor unloaded for a half a second on start up and one second on shutdown to prevent reverse rotation. A two minute anti--short time guard is applied by the DSC after shutting the compressor off. The DSC has an alarm relay output that is connected to the MBB. When this MBB input switch is closed, the MBB activates the T051 alert. Check the LED status on the DSC for flash alarm codes and correct any problems. Table 10 shows the DSC's Red LED flash codes. 32 48/50PD POWER LED (green) indicates voltage is present at the 24VAC power terminal. When the 2 minute anti--short cycle timer is active, the green LED will flash. UNLOADED LED (yellow) indicates the unloader solenoid status. The LED is on when the unloader solenoid is energized. ALERT LED (red) communicates an abnormal system condition through a unique flash code. All LEDs Flashing at the Same Rate indicates 24VAC supply is too low for operation. All LEDs On Solid at the Same Time indicates Digital Scroll Controller failure. Flash Code 1 Reserved for future use Flash Code 2 High Discharge Temperature This occurs when the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) has measured a temperature above 268 F (131 C) or the thermistor has short circuited (jumpered out). The DSC will de--energize the compressor contactor and unloader solenoid, and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051 alert on the ComfortLink Control. The compressor will be allowed to restart after 30 minute delay and after the DTT reads below 250 F (120 C). The flash code and alarm relay contacts will be reset after the compressor has run for 60 minutes without any other ALERTs. If five discharge temperature ALERTs have occurred within four hours, the DSC will lock out the compressor. The lockout can only be reset by cycling the 24VAC power off and on. Flash Code 3 Compressor Protector Trip This occurs when the demand signal from the system controller is greater than 1.44VDC and there is no compressor current detected. This could be due to the compressor's internal overload protector being open, fuse or breaker open, power disconnected to compressor contactor, compressor power wiring not run through DSC current transformer port or a compressor contactor failure. The DSC will de--energize the compressor contactor and unloader solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051 alert on the ComfortLink Control. The DSC will wait for the two minute anti--short cycle timer to time out and if the system controller demand signal is still greater than 1.44VDC, energize the compressor contactor again. If compressor current is detected on the restart, the ALERT code and alarm relay output will reset. The DSC will attempt to restart compressor as long as the system controller demand is above 1.44VDC. There is no lockout feature for this ALERT. Flash Code 4 Locked Rotor A locked rotor condition in the compressor is sensed by the DSC on four consecutive start ups. The DSC will de--energize the compressor contactor and unloader solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051 alert on the ComfortLink Control. This code results in a lockout and can only be reset by cycling the 24VAC power off and on. Flash Code 5 Demand Signal Loss This occurs when the demand signal input has dropped below 0.5VDC. The demand input signal wire may be disconnected or the system controller providing the signal may not be powered. The DSC will de--energize the compressor contactor and unloader solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051 alert on the ComfortLink Control. Once the system controller demand signal input has risen above 0.5VDC, the ALERT code and alarm relay output will reset. If the demand signal is above 1.44VDC and the anti--short cycle timer has timed out, the compressor will restart. Flash Code 6 Discharge Thermistor Fault This occurs when the DSC is not receiving a signal from the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT). The thermistor may be missing, disconnected or a wire broken. The alarm relay contacts will close and the DSC will not increase the capacity of the compressor beyond 50% loading. This ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset by reconnecting the DTT. Flash Code 7 Reserved for future use Flash Code 8 Compressor Contactor Fault This occurs when the compressor current is detected when the system controller demand signal is below 1.44VDC. The compressor contactor may have welded contacts or the contacts may be mechanically jammed. The compressor will continue to run in this condition since the DSC cannot open the compressor contactor. The DSC will energize the compressor contactor and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051 alert on the ComfortLink Control. The unloader solenoid will remain energized causing the compressor to run unloaded as long as the system controller demand signal is less than 1.44VDC. If the system controller demand is greater than 1.44VDC, the unloader solenoid will de--energize causing the compressor to run loaded. The ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset when current is no longer detected while system controller demand signal is below 1.44VDC. Flash Code 9 Low 24VAC Supply This occurs when the supply voltage to the DSC has dropped below 18.5VDC. The DSC will de--energize the compressor contactor and unloader solenoid. The alarm relay contacts may close if the voltage is high enough for the alarm relay to pull in. The ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset when the supply voltage to the DSC rises above 19.5VAC. 33 48/50PD Table 10 DSC Red LED Flash Codes LED Flash Code 1 Flash 2 Flash 3 Flash Description Reserved for Future Use High Discharge Temperature Compressor Protector Trip Action Taken by Control N/A Compressor shutdown Compressor shutdown 4 Flash 5 Flash 6 Flash 7 Flash 8 Flash 9 Flash Locked Rotor Demand Signal Loss Discharge Thermistor Fault Compressor lockout Compressor shutdown Capacity Limited Reserved for Future Use N/A Compressor Contactor Fault Low 24VAC Supply Keep capacity at 15% Compressor shutdown Reset Method N/A Probable Cause N/A Automatic Automatic Manual Compressor discharge temperature is greater then 268 degrees F or the DTT is shorted. Compressor's internal overload protector being open, fuse or breaker open, power disconnected to compressor contactor, compressor power wiring not run through DSC current transformer port or a compressor contactor failure. Four consecutive start ups with locked rotor. Automatic Automatic Signal wire may be disconnected or the system controller providing the signal may not be powered DTT may be missing, disconnected or a wire broken N/A N/A Automatic Automatic Compressor contactor may have welded contacts or the contacts may be mechanically jammed Bad connection or transformer. Economizer Troubleshooting Use the unit Scrolling Marquee display or a CCN device to view the economizer status display and the economizer diagnostic display (see Appendix A) for information on the economizer operation. Check the current alarms and alarm history for any economizer alarm codes and correct any causes. (See Table 11.) Verify any unique control configurations per installed site requirements or accessories. If alarms conditions are corrected and cleared, operation of the economizer may be verified by using the Service Test mode (see Service Test section and Table 5). The following steps specify how to test the economizer using the Scrolling Marquee display. See Table 11 for general economizer service analysis. 1. Enter the Service Test main menu on the display. 2. Enter TEST and turn ON test mode. A password may be needed in order to turn ON the Service Test. The default password is 1111. 3. Return to the main level of Service Test. 4. Enter the INDP submenu and enter an initial value for ECON. This will drive the economizer damper to the specified position. Continue to adjust the ECON value to make sure the economizer opens and closes. 5. Because of a mechanical problem with the economizer, the actuator might acquire a new degree of rotation which is less than M.ANG. If this occurs, a "T414 Economizer Damper Actuator Out of Calibration" alert will be generated. This alert can only occur if the economizer is using digital communications (Configuration ECONE.CTL = 1 or 2). The economizer calibration procedure (Service TestIND.PE.CAL) will reconfigure the actuator to the new fully closed and fully open positions. To implement the calibration procedure, change E.CAL from OFF to ON. E.CAL will remain ON as long as the calibration procedure is being implemented (as long as 5 minutes). During the calibration procedure the actuator will close fully and then open fully. After the calibration is complete, the degree of rotation should be greater than M.ANG, causing the T414 alert to clear. If the T414 alert does not clear, check the economizer damper for other mechanical problems. 6. Return to Service TestTEST and turn OFF test mode. This will cause the unit to return to normal operation. 34 48/50PD Table 11 Economizer Service Analysis PROBLEM Damper Does Not Move. POSSIBLE CAUSE Indoor Fan is off. Actuator is unplugged at motor or at economizer board. Unit is not configured for economizer. Outdoor--- air temperature is above economizer high temperature lockout. Outdoor--- air temperature is below economizer low temperature lockout. Economizer Operation is Limited to Minimum Position. Communication loss to economizer board. Damper is jammed. Minimum position is set incorrectly. Outdoor--- air temperature is above economizer high temperature lockout. Outdoor--- air temperature is below economizer low temperature lockout. Outdoor--- air thermistor is faulty. Low suction pressure problem with a compressor. Economizer Position is Less Than Minimum Position. IAQ is controlling minimum damper position. Unit is in Unoccupied mode. Economizer Does Not Return to Minimum Position. Damper Does Not Close on Power Loss. Outdoor Damper Does Not Fully Close at 0% or Fully Open at 100%. Economizer is not at configured minimum position Damper is jammed. Unit is operating under free cooling. Damper is jammed or spring return is backwards. Economizer actuator is out of calibration. Unit is operating under free cooling or a force is being applied to its commanded position. Unit fan speed is offsetting the economizer minimum position to maintain proper ventilation. LEGEND CCN --IAQ --VFD --- Carrier Comfort Network Indoor Air Quality Variable Frequency Drive REMEDY Check for proper VFD connections. Check that VFD is illuminated and in Auto mode. Unit is not configured for continuous fan operation and there are no cooling or heating demands. Unit is in Unoccupied mode and there is no call for heating or cooling. Tripped circuit breaker. No power to the unit. Unit is off via CCN command. Check wiring connections. Configure unit for economizer per the instructions. Adjust the high temperature lockout setting if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. Adjust the low temperature lockout setting if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. Check wiring connections. Identify the obstruction and safely remove. Adjust minimum position setting. Adjust the high temperature lockout setting if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. Adjust the low temperature lockout setting if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. Replace outdoor--- air thermistor. Economizer is operating correctly, identify compressor problem. Adjust the IAQ settings if incorrect, otherwise, the economizer is operating correctly. Adjust unit occupied schedule if incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. Identify the obstruction and safely remove. Economizer is operating correctly. Identify the obstruction and safely remove. Remove actuator, flip it over and re--- install. Enter Service Test mode and run the Calibrate Economizer (E.CAL) procedure. Economizer is operating correctly. Economizer is operating correctly. 35 48/50PD Heating Troubleshooting Use the unit Scrolling Marquee display or a CCN device to view the heating status display and the heating diagnostic display (see Appendix A) for information on the heating operation. Check the current alarms and alarm history for any heating alarm codes and correct any causes. (See Table 12.) Verify any unique control configurations per installed site requirements or accessories. If alarms conditions are corrected and cleared, operation of the heat stages and indoor fan may be verified by using the Service Test mode. (See Table 5.) Gas Heat (48PD Units Only) See Table 12 for general gas heating service analysis. See Fig. 9 for service analysis of the IGC board logic. Check the status LED on the IGC board for any flashing alarm codes and correct any causes. (See Table 13.) Electric Heat (50PD Units Only) See Table 14 for electric heating service analysis. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Troubleshooting The VFD must be in "Auto" mode and when commanding it to 100% the voltage signal should be 10vdc across AI1 and AIGND. Verify all parameters are correct to factory defaults. See Appendix B for parameters and additional troubleshooting. Phase Loss Protection The phase loss protection option will monitor the three-phase electrical system to provide phase reversal and phase loss protection. Phase Reversal Protection If the control senses an incorrect phase relationship, the relay (K1) will be de-energized (opening its contact). If the phase relationship is correct, the relay will be energized. The control has a self-bypass function after a pre-set time. If the control determines that the three phases stay in a correct relationship for 10 consecutive minutes, the relay will stay energized regardless of the phase sequence of three inputs as long as 24-vac control voltage is applied. This self-bypass function will be reset if all three phases are restored in a phase loss event. Phase Loss Protection If the reverse rotation board senses any one of the three phase inputs has no AC voltage, the relay will be de--energized (opening its contact). This protection is always active as long as 24-vac control voltage is applied, and is not affected by the self by-pass function of the phase sequence monitoring function. However, in the event of phase loss, the relay will be re-energized only if all three phases are restored and the three phases are in the correct sequence. A red LED is provided to indicate the function of the board. See the table below. LED STATUS On Continuously Blinking Off FUNCTION Relay contact closed (normal operation). Relay contact open (phase loss or phase reversal has occurred) --- No power will be supplied to the control system. 24 vac control power not present (off). Table 12 Gas Heating Service Analysis PROBLEM Burners Will Not Ignite. Inadequate Heating. Poor Flame Characteristics. CAUSE Unit is not configured for heat. Active alarm. No power to unit. No power to IGC. Heaters off due to time guard to prevent short cycling. Occupancy schedule set point not calling for Heating. No gas at main burners. Water in gas line. Dirty air filters. Gas input too low. Occupancy schedule set point set too low. Unit undersized for load. Restricted or low airflow. Too much outdoor air. Limit switch cycles main burners. Incomplete combustion (lack of combustion air) results in: Aldehyde odors, CO, sooting flame, or floating flame. Burners Will Not Turn Off. Unit is in Minimum on --- time. Unit running in Service Test mode. Main gas valve stuck. LEGEND IGC --- Integrated Gas Controller SAT --- Supply Air Temperature REMEDY Check heating configurations using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Check active alarms using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee and the IGC alert flash codes. Check power supply, fuses, wiring, and circuit breakers. Check fuses and plugs. Check active alarms using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee and the IGC alert flash codes. Check using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Check gas line for air and purge as necessary. After purging gas line of air, allow gas to dissipate for at least 5 minutes before attempting to re--- light unit. Drain water and install drip. Replace air filters. Check gas pressure at manifold. Refer to gas valve adjustment in the Service section. Check setpoints and adjust if necessary. Decrease load or increase of size of unit. Remove restriction, verify proper fan speed operation, and check SAT compared to the SAT heating limits. Check economizer position and configuration. Adjust minimum position if needed using ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee. Verify proper fan speed operation. Check rotation of blower and temperature rise of unit. Adjust as needed. Check all screws around flue outlets and burner compartment. Tighten as necessary. Cracked heat exchanger, replace. Unit is over--- fired, reduce input. Adjust gas line or manifold pressure. Check vent for restriction. Clean as necessary. Check orifice to burner alignment. Check using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee and the IGC alert flash codes. Check using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Turn off gas supply and unit power. Replace gas valve. 36 LEGEND IDM -- Induced-Draft Motor IGC -- Integrated Gas Unit Controller NOTE: Thermostat Fan Switch in the "AUTO" position. Fig. 9 -- IGC Service Analysis Logic 37 C07014 48/50PD Table 13 IGC Board LED Alarm Codes LED FLASH CODE On Off 1 Flash 2 Flashes 3 Flashes 4 Flashes 5 Flashes 6 Flashes 7 Flashes 8 Flashes 9 Flashes DESCRIPTION Normal Operation Hardware Failure Indoor Fan On/Off Delay Modified Limit Switch Fault Flame Sense Fault Four Consecutive Limit Switch Fault Ignition Fault Induced Draft Motor Fault Rollout Switch Lockout Internal Control Lockout Temporary Software Lockout ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL -- No gas heating. 5 seconds subtracted from On delay. 5 seconds added to Off delay (3 min max). Gas valve and igniter Off. Indoor fan and inducer On. Indoor fan and inducer On. No gas heating. No gas heating. If heat off: no gas heating. If heat on: gas valve Off and inducer On. Gas valve and igniter Off. Indoor fan and inducer On. No gas heating. No gas heating. RESET METHOD PROBABLE CAUSE -- -- -- Loss of power to the IGC. Check 5 amp fuse on IGC, power to unit, 24V circuit breaker, transformer, and wiring to the IGC. Power reset. High temperature limit switch opens during heat exchanger warm-up period before fan-on delay expires. High temperature limit switch opens within 10 minutes of heat call (W) Off. See Limit Switch Fault. Limit switch closed, or heat call (W) Off. High temperature limit switch is open. Check the operation of the indoor (evaporator) fan motor. Ensure that the supply-air temperature rise is within the range on the unit nameplate. Check wiring and limit switch operation. Flame sense normal. The IGC sensed a flame when the gas valve should Power reset for LED reset. be closed. Check wiring, flame sensor, and gas valve operation. Heat call (W) Off. 4 consecutive limit switch faults within a single call Power reset for LED reset. for heat. See Limit Switch Fault. Heat call (W) Off. Unit unsuccessfully attempted ignition for 15 minutes. Power reset for LED reset. Check igniter and flame sensor electrode spacing, gaps, etc. Check flame sense and igniter wiring. Check gas valve operation and gas supply. Inducer sense normal, or heat call (W) Off. Inducer sense On when heat call Off, or inducer sense Off when heat call On. Check wiring, voltage, and operation of IGC motor. Check speed sensor wiring to IGC. Power reset. Rollout switch has opened. Check gas valve operation. Check induced-draft blower wheel is properly secured to motor shaft. Power reset. IGC has sensed internal hardware or software error. If fault is not cleared by resetting 24 v power, replace the IGC. 1 hour auto reset, or power reset. Electrical interference is disrupting the IGC software. LEGEND IGC --- Integrated Gas Unit Control LED --- Light---Emitting Diode NOTES: 1. There is a 3 ---second pause between alarm code displays. 2. If more than one alarm code exists, all applicable alarm codes will be displayed in numerical sequence. 3. Alarm codes on the IGC will be lost if power to the unit is interrupted. 48/50PD Table 14 Electric Heat Service Analysis PROBLEM Heat Will Not Turn On. CAUSE Unit is not configured for heat. Active alarm. No power to unit. Unit is in minimum heat off--- time, or minimum cool--- heat changeover time. Heat forced off in Service Test. No 24 vac at heater contactor. Inadequate Heating. Open temperature limit switch on heater. Dirty air filters. Bad heater elements. Occupancy schedule set point set too low. Heat undersized for load. Restricted or low airflow. Too much outdoor air. Limit switch cycles heaters. Heat Will Not Turn Off. Unit is in minimum heat on --- time. Occupancy schedule set point still calling for Heating. Unit running in Service Test mode. Heater contactor failed. LEGEND SAT --- Supply Air Temperature REMEDY Check heating configurations using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Check active alarms using ComfortLinkTM Scrolling Marquee. Check power supply, fuses, wiring, and circuit breakers. Check using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Check using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Turn Service Test mode off. Check transformer, circuit breaker, auto--- reset limit switches on heater, and manual--- reset limit switches (LS) on indoor fan housing. Check minimum airflow. Check limit switch when it is cool, replace if not. Replace air filters. Power off unit and remove high voltage wires. Check resistance of element, replace if open. Check setpoints and adjust if necessary. Decrease load or increase size of heater. Remove restriction, verify proper fan speed operation, and check SAT compared to the SAT heating limits. Check economizer position and configuration. Adjust minimum position if needed using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Verify proper fan speed operation. Check rotation of blower, temperature rise of unit, and minimum airflow. Adjust as needed. Check using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Check using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Check using ComfortLinkt Scrolling Marquee. Power off unit. Check contactor and replace if closed. 38 48/50PD Thermistor Troubleshooting The electronic control uses thermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of the unit. Resistances at various temperatures are listed in Table 15--17. Thermistor pin connection points are shown in the Major System Components section. The general locations of the thermistors are shown the Major System Components section. Air Temperatures Air temperatures are measured with 10 kilo-ohm thermistors. This includes supply-air temperature (SAT), outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature sensors (T55, T56, T58), and return air temperature (RAT). The supply air temperature (SAT), return air temperature (RAT) and outdoor air temperature (OAT) thermistors use a snap-mount to attach through the unit sheet metal panels. The snap-mount tabs must be flattened on the tip end of the sensor to release for removal from the panel. (See Fig. 10.) To reinstall, make sure the snap-mount tabs extend out. C07015 Fig. 10 -- SAT, RAT and OAT Thermistor Mounting Refrigerant Temperatures Condenser coil temperatures are measured with 5 kilo-ohm thermistors. These measurements provide an approximate saturated condensing temperature for each circuit (SCT.A). Fig. 11 shows the factory locations for the SCT thermistors on 48/50PD units. Ensure that thermistors are placed at the correct location and are snapped securely over the return bend so that contact is made between the thermistor and the tube. Fig. 11 -- Saturated Condensing Temperature Thermistor Location C07016 Thermistor/Temperature Sensor Check A high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this check. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate thermistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base Board (see Major System Components section). Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor temperature from Table 15--17. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type temperature-measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading. Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature determined from thermistor voltage reading should be close, within 5°F, if care was taken in applying thermocouple and taking readings. If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature (freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, or by determining the resistance with unit shut down and thermistor disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the Scrolling Marquee display. 39 Sensor Trim Corrective offsets can be applied to the space temperature and the supply air temperature sensor readings. These corrections are set in the ConfigurationTRIM menu for the display, or in the MaintenanceTRIM table for CCN. See the Indoor Air Quality section for available adjustments to IAQ and OAQ sensor readings. The space temperature may be corrected by entering either a calibration temperature value in SPT.C, or an offset temperature value in SPT.T. The supply-air temperature may be corrected by entering either a calibration temperature value in SAT.C, or an offset temperature value in SAT.T. The return--air temperature may be corrected by entering either a calibration temperature value in RAT.C or an offset temperature value in RAT.T. Temperature corrections should only be made if sensor readings are compared to an accurate reference temperature measurement device. Transducer Troubleshooting The electronic control uses suction pressure transducers to measure the suction pressure of the refrigerant circuits. The pressure/voltage characteristics of these transducers are in shown in Table 18, the 5vdc power is applied to legs A and B of the transducer and legs B to C represent the voltage drop shown in the table. The accuracy of these transducers can be verified by connecting an accurate pressure gauge to the second refrigerant port in the suction line. Forcing Inputs and Outputs Many variables may have their value forced through CCN or directly at the local display. This can be useful during diagnostic testing and also during operation, typically as part of an advanced third party control scheme. Input and output points that may be forced are indicated as `forcible' in the write status column of the display and CCN tables. If the user needs to force a variable, follow the same process as when editing a configuration parameter. A forced variable will be displayed on the Scrolling Marquee with a blinking period "." following its value. A forced value on NavigatorTM accessory is indicated with a blinking "f". A forced value on CCN devices is indicated with "Control" if forced at the unit display, or "Supervisor" if forced via CCN. To remove a local force with the Scrolling Marquee, select the point with the ENTER key and then press the up--arrow and down-arrow keys simultaneously. IMPORTANT: In the case of a control power reset, any force in effect at the time of power reset will be cleared. 48/50PD 40 48/50PD TEMP (F) --- 25 --- 24 --- 23 --- 22 --- 21 --- 20 --- 19 --- 18 --- 17 --- 16 --- 15 --- 14 --- 13 --- 12 --- 11 --- 10 --- 9 --- 8 --- 7 --- 6 --- 5 --- 4 --- 3 --- 2 --- 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 4.758 4.750 4.741 4.733 4.724 4.715 4.705 4.696 4.686 4.676 4.665 4.655 4.644 4.633 4.621 4.609 4.597 4.585 4.572 4.560 4.546 4.533 4.519 4.505 4.490 4.476 4.461 4.445 4.429 4.413 4.397 4.380 4.363 4.346 4.328 4.310 4.292 4.273 4.254 4.235 4.215 4.195 4.174 4.153 4.132 4.111 4.089 4.067 4.044 4.021 3.998 3.975 3.951 3.927 3.903 3.878 3.853 3.828 3.802 3.776 3.750 3.723 3.697 3.670 3.654 3.615 3.587 3.559 3.531 3.503 3.474 3.445 3.416 3.387 3.357 3.328 3.298 3.268 3.238 3.208 3.178 3.147 3.117 3.086 3.056 3.025 Table 15 Temperature (_F) vs Resistance/Voltage Drop Values for RAT, OAT, SAT, and SPT Thermistors (10K at 25_C Resistors) RESISTANCE (Ohms) 196,453 189,692 183,300 177,000 171,079 165,238 159,717 154,344 149,194 144,250 139,443 134,891 130,402 126,183 122,018 118,076 114,236 110,549 107,006 103,558 100,287 97,060 94,020 91,019 88,171 85,396 82,729 80,162 77,662 75,286 72,940 70,727 68,542 66,465 64,439 62,491 60,612 58,781 57,039 55,319 53,693 52,086 50,557 49,065 47,627 46,240 44,888 43,598 42,324 41,118 39,926 38,790 37,681 36,610 35,577 34,569 33,606 32,654 31,752 30,860 30,009 29,177 28,373 27,597 26,838 26,113 25,396 24,715 24,042 23,399 22,770 22,161 21,573 20,998 20,447 19,903 19,386 18,874 18,384 17,904 17,441 16,991 16,552 16,131 15,714 15,317 TEMP (F) 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 2.994 2.963 2.932 2.901 2.870 2.839 2.808 2.777 2.746 2.715 2.684 2.653 2.622 2.592 2.561 2.530 2.500 2.470 2.439 2.409 2.379 2.349 2.319 2.290 2.260 2.231 2.202 2.173 2.144 2.115 2.087 2.059 2.030 2.003 1.975 1.948 1.921 1.894 1.867 1.841 1.815 1.789 1.763 1.738 1.713 1.688 1.663 1.639 1.615 1.591 1.567 1.544 1.521 1.498 1.475 1.453 1.431 1.409 1.387 1.366 1.345 1.324 1.304 1.284 1.264 1.244 1.225 1.206 1.187 1.168 1.150 1.132 1.114 1.096 1.079 1.062 1.045 1.028 1.012 0.996 0.980 0.965 0.949 0.934 0.919 0.905 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 14,925 14,549 14,180 13,824 13,478 13,139 12,814 12,493 12,187 11,884 11,593 11,308 11,031 10,764 10,501 10,249 10,000 9,762 9,526 9,300 9,078 8,862 8,653 8,448 8,251 8,056 7,869 7,685 7,507 7,333 7,165 6,999 6,838 6,683 6,530 6,383 6,238 6,098 5,961 5,827 5,698 5,571 5,449 5,327 5,210 5,095 4,984 4,876 4,769 4,666 4,564 4,467 4,370 4,277 4.185 4,096 4,008 3,923 3,840 3,759 3,681 3,603 3,529 3,455 3,383 3,313 3,244 3,178 3,112 3,049 2,986 2,926 2,866 2,809 2,752 2,697 2,643 2,590 2,539 2,488 2,439 2,391 2,343 2,297 2,253 2,209 TEMP (F) 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.890 0.876 0.862 0.848 0.835 0.821 0.808 0.795 0.782 0.770 0.758 0.745 0.733 0.722 0.710 0.699 0.687 0.676 0.666 0.655 0.645 0.634 0.624 0.614 0.604 0.595 0.585 0.576 0.567 0.558 0.549 0.540 0.532 0.523 0.515 0.507 0.499 0.491 0.483 0.476 0.468 0.461 0.454 0.447 0.440 0.433 0.426 0.419 0.413 0.407 0.400 0.394 0.388 0.382 0.376 0.370 0.365 0.359 0.354 0.349 0.343 0.338 0.333 0.328 0.323 0.318 0.314 0.309 0.305 0.300 0.296 0.292 0.288 0.284 0.279 0.275 0.272 0.268 0.264 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 2,166 2,124 2,083 2,043 2,003 1,966 1,928 1,891 1,855 1,820 1,786 1,752 1,719 1,687 1,656 1,625 1,594 1,565 1,536 1,508 1,480 1,453 1,426 1,400 1,375 1,350 1,326 1,302 1,278 1,255 1,233 1,211 1,190 1,169 1,148 1,128 1,108 1,089 1,070 1,052 1,033 1,016 998 981 964 947 931 915 900 885 870 855 841 827 814 800 787 774 762 749 737 725 714 702 691 680 670 659 649 639 629 620 610 601 592 583 574 566 557 41 48/50PD TEMP (F) --- 25 --- 24 --- 23 --- 22 --- 21 --- 20 --- 19 --- 18 --- 17 --- 16 --- 15 --- 14 --- 13 --- 12 --- 11 --- 10 --- 9 --- 8 --- 7 --- 6 --- 5 --- 4 --- 3 --- 2 --- 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Table 16 Temperature (_F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop Values for SCT Sensors (5K at 25_C Resistors) VOLTAGE DROP (V) 3.699 3.689 3.679 3.668 3.658 3.647 3.636 3.624 3.613 3.601 3.588 3.576 3.563 3.550 3.536 3.523 3.509 3.494 3.480 3.465 3.450 3.434 3.418 3.402 3.386 3.369 3.352 3.335 3.317 3.299 3.281 3.262 3.243 3.224 3.205 3.185 3.165 3.145 3.124 3.103 3.082 3.060 3.038 3.016 2.994 2.972 2.949 2.926 2.903 2.879 2.856 2.832 2.808 2.784 2.759 2.735 2.710 2.685 2.660 2.634 2.609 2.583 2.558 2.532 2.506 2.480 2.454 2.428 2.402 2.376 2.349 2.323 2.296 2.270 2.244 2.217 2.191 2.165 2.138 2.112 2.086 2.060 2.034 2.008 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 98,010 94,707 91,522 88,449 85,486 82,627 79,871 77,212 74,648 72,175 69,790 67,490 65,272 63,133 61,070 59,081 57,162 55,311 53,526 51,804 50,143 48,541 46,996 45,505 44,066 42,679 41,339 40,047 38,800 37,596 36,435 35,313 34,231 33,185 32,176 31,202 30,260 29,351 28,473 27,624 26,804 26,011 25,245 24,505 23,789 23,096 22,427 21,779 21,153 20,547 19,960 19,393 18,843 18,311 17,796 17,297 16,814 16,346 15,892 15,453 15,027 14,614 14,214 13,826 13,449 13,084 12,730 12,387 12,053 11,730 11,416 11,112 10,816 10,529 10,250 9,979 9,717 9,461 9,213 8,973 8,739 8,511 8,291 8,076 TEMP (F) 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.982 1.956 1.930 1.905 1.879 1.854 1.829 1.804 1.779 1.754 1.729 1.705 1.681 1.656 1.632 1.609 1.585 1.562 1.538 1.516 1.493 1.470 1.448 1.426 1.404 1.382 1.361 1.340 1.319 1.298 1.278 1.257 1.237 1.217 1.198 1.179 1.160 1.141 1.122 1.104 1.086 1.068 1.051 1.033 1.016 0.999 0.983 0.966 0.950 0.934 0.918 0.903 0.888 0.873 0.858 0.843 0.829 0.815 0.801 0.787 0.774 0.761 0.748 0.735 0.723 0.710 0.698 0.686 0.674 0.663 0.651 0.640 0.629 0.618 0.608 0.597 0.587 0.577 0.567 0.557 0.548 0.538 0.529 0.520 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 7,866 7,665 7,468 7,277 7,091 6,911 6,735 6,564 6,399 6,238 6,081 5,929 5,781 5,637 5,497 5,361 5,229 5,101 4,976 4,855 4,737 4,622 4,511 4,403 4,298 4,196 4,096 4,000 3,906 3,814 3,726 3,640 3,556 3,474 3,395 3,318 3,243 3,170 3,099 3,031 2,964 2,898 2,835 2,773 2,713 2,655 2,597 2,542 2,488 2,436 2,385 2,335 2,286 2,239 2,192 2,147 2,103 2,060 2,018 1,977 1,937 1,898 1,860 1,822 1,786 1,750 1,715 1,680 1,647 1,614 1,582 1,550 1,519 1,489 1,459 1,430 1,401 1,373 1,345 1,318 1,291 1,265 1,240 1,214 TEMP (F) 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.511 0.502 0.494 0.485 0.477 0.469 0.461 0.453 0.445 0.438 0.430 0.423 0.416 0.408 0.402 0.395 0.388 0.381 0.375 0.369 0.362 0.356 0.350 0.344 0.339 0.333 0.327 0.322 0.317 0.311 0.306 0.301 0.296 0.291 0.286 0.282 0.277 0.272 0.268 0.264 0.259 0.255 0.251 0.247 0.243 0.239 0.235 0.231 0.228 0.224 0.220 0.217 0.213 0.210 0.206 0.203 0.200 0.197 0.194 0.191 0.188 0.185 0.182 0.179 0.176 0.173 0.171 0.168 0.165 0.163 0.160 0.158 0.155 0.153 0.151 0.148 0.146 0.144 0.142 0.140 0.138 0.135 0.133 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 1,190 1,165 1,141 1,118 1,095 1,072 1,050 1,029 1,007 986 965 945 925 906 887 868 850 832 815 798 782 765 750 734 719 705 690 677 663 650 638 626 614 602 591 581 570 561 551 542 533 524 516 508 501 494 487 480 473 467 461 456 450 445 439 434 429 424 419 415 410 405 401 396 391 386 382 377 372 367 361 356 350 344 338 332 325 318 311 304 297 289 282 42 Degree C --- 40 --- 35 --- 30 --- 25 --- 20 --- 15 --- 10 --- 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 Table 17 Temperature vs Resistance Values for the DTT Thermistor (86K at 25_C Resistors) Degree F --- 40 --- 31 --- 22 --- 13 --- 4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 149 Resistance (k Ohms) 2889.60 2087.22 1522.20 1121.44 834.72 627.28 475.74 363.99 280.82 218.41 171.17 135.14 107.44 86.00 69.28 56.16 45.81 37.58 30.99 25.68 21.40 17.91 Degree C 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 Degree F 158 167 176 185 194 203 212 221 230 239 248 257 266 275 284 293 302 311 320 329 338 347 180 356 Resistance (k Ohms) 15.07 12.73 10.79 9.20 7.87 6.77 5.85 5.09 4.45 3.87 3.35 2.92 2.58 2.28 2.02 1.80 1.59 1.39 1.25 1.12 1.01 0.92 0.83 48/50PD 43 48/50PD Time (sec) PRESSURE (psig) 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 Table 18 Pressure (psig) vs. Voltage Drop Values for Suction Pressure Transducers VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.465 0.485 0.505 0.524 0.544 0.564 0.583 0.603 0.623 0.642 0.662 0.682 0.702 0.721 0.741 0.761 0.780 0.800 0.820 0.839 0.859 0.879 0.898 0.918 0.938 0.958 0.977 0.997 1.017 1.036 1.056 1.076 1.095 1.115 PRESSURE (psig) 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 126 128 130 132 134 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.135 1.154 1.174 1.194 1.214 1.233 1.253 1.273 1.292 1.312 1.332 1.351 1.371 1.391 1.410 1.430 1.450 1.470 1.489 1.509 1.529 1.548 1.568 1.588 1.607 1.627 1.647 1.666 1.686 1.706 1.726 1.745 1.765 1.785 PRESSURE (psig) 136 138 140 142 144 146 148 150 152 154 156 158 160 162 164 166 168 170 172 174 176 178 180 182 184 186 188 190 192 194 196 198 200 202 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.804 1.824 1.844 1.863 1.883 1.903 1.922 1.942 1.962 1.982 2.001 2.021 2.041 2.060 2.080 2.100 2.119 2.139 2.159 2.178 2.198 2.218 2.237 2.257 2.277 2.297 2.316 2.336 2.356 2.375 2.395 2.415 2.434 2.454 PRESSURE (psig) 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 218 220 222 224 226 228 230 232 234 236 238 240 242 244 246 248 250 252 254 256 258 260 262 264 266 268 270 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 2.474 2.493 2.513 2.533 2.553 2.572 2.592 2.612 2.631 2.651 2.671 2.690 2.710 2.730 2.749 2.769 2.789 2.809 2.828 2.848 2.868 2.887 2.907 2.927 2.946 2.966 2.986 3.005 3.025 3.045 3.065 3.084 3.104 3.124 MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS General The 48/50PD single package rooftop units contain the ComfortLinkTM electronic control system that monitors all operations of the rooftop. The control system is composed of several main control components and available factory-installed options or field-installed accessories as listed in sections below. See Fig. 13--15 for the control and power schematics for 48/50PD. Fig. 16 shows the layout of the control box, unit, and thermistor and transducer locations for the 48/50PD. Digital Scroll Compressor These units are equipped with a Copeland Digital Scroll Compressor that can vary the refrigerant capacity between 100 and 15%. This is accomplished by a mechanism in the compressor that separates the two scroll spirals which stops the pumping of the refrigerant gas. This mechanism is operated by the differential pressure between the suction and discharge of the compressor. The pressure to operate the unloading mechanism is controlled by a small solenoid situated in a refrigerant line between the top of the compressor and the suction line. When the solenoid is energized, the compressor is unloaded. The solenoid coil is controlled by the Copeland Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) that operates on a 1 to 5V signal from the ComfortLinkt Auxiliary Board (AUX1) and converts this into a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal to the solenoid valve. The pulse width modulated signal is an on and off signal that repeats every 15 seconds with the off time portion of the 15 seconds representing the % loading of the compressor. Fig. 12 shows the PWM signal to the solenoid which represents the actual running capacity of the compressor. Time Unloaded vs Time Loaded Determines the Capacity 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0% 15% 30% 50% 75% 100% Capacity Seconds Unloaded Seconds Loaded Fig. 12 -- Pulse Width Modulated Signal C09247 44 Fig. 13 -- 48PD Control Wiring Schematic 45 C08582 48/50PD 48/50PD Fig. 14 -- 50PD Control Wiring Schematic 46 C08583 Fig. 15 -- 48/50PD Power Wiring Schematic and Legend 47 C08584 48/50PD 48/50PD Fig. 16 -- Typical Unit Component Arrangement 48 C08657 48/50PD Main Base Board (MBB) See Fig. 17 and Table 19. The MBB is the center of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the major portion of the operating software and controls the operation of the unit. The MBB continuously monitors input/output channel information received from its inputs and from the Economizer Control Board (ECB). The MBB receives inputs from thermistors and transducers. The MBB also receives the Current Sensor inputs for compressors and other discrete or digital inputs. The MBB reads space temperature (SPT) from either a T--55, T--56 or T--58 device and space temperature offset (SPTO) from a T--56 device. See Field-Installed Accessories section. The MBB controls 9 relays. IMPORTANT: The Main Base Board (MBB) has a 3-position instance jumper that is factory set to `1.' Do not change this setting. RED LED - STATUS GREEN LED LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) CEPL130346-01 YELLOW LED CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK) INSTANCE JUMPER (SET TO 1) J1 J2 J4 J3 J5 J6 STATUS LEN CCN J7 J8 Fig. 17 -- Main Base Board (MBB) J10 J9 C07026 49 48/50PD DISPLAY NAME FDWN HUM C.ALM CMP.A FIL.S CS.A1 SPT SPTO OAT SAT SCT.A RAT FAN.S SSP.A CTLR CCH OFC.1 IDF ALRM HT.1 HT.2 Table 19 MBB Connections POINT DESCRIPTION Input power from TRAN1 IGC Fan Request Fire shutdown switch Space Humidity switch Digital Scroll Unloader Scroll Compressor Alarm Compressor A Feedback Filter status switch Compressor A1 Current Sensor Space temperature (T55/56) Space temperature offset (T56) Outdoor air temperature Supply air temperature Saturated condenser temperature, circuit A Return air temperature Fan status switch Suction pressure, circuit A Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr Crankcase heat relay Outdoor fan 1 relay Indoor fan VFD pwr relay Alarm relay Heat Stage 2 relay Heat Stage 1 relay Local Equipment Network (LEN) Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Network device power Scrolling Marquee Display (LEN) Scrolling Marquee Display power Modulation Board (AUX1) LEN Optional ECB power SENSOR LOCATION INPUTS control box gas section supply/return/space space indoor fan section control box space space outdoor coil support indoor fan housing, or supply duct outdoor coil, circuit A Return air Section indoor fan section compressor A suction OUTPUTS COMMUNICATION TYPE OF I/O 24 VAC switch input switch input switch input switch input switch input switch input switch input 0--- 5vdc digital input 10k thermistor 10k thermistor 10k thermistor 10k thermistor 5k thermistor 10k thermistor switch input 0--- 5 VDC pressure transducer relay relay relay relay relay relay relay communication communication 24 VAC communication 24 VAC communication 24 VAC CONNECTION PIN NUMBER J1, 1--- 3 J6, 4 J6, 6 J7, 4 J7, 6 J7, 8 J7, 10 J9, 2--- 3 J9, 10--- 12 J8, 1--- 2 J8, 2--- 3 J8, 5--- 6 J8, 7--- 8 J8, 9--- 10 J8, 13--- 14 J8, 15--- 16 J8, 18--- 20 J10, 11 J10, 13 J10, 19 J10, 21 J10, 23 J10, 25 J10, 27 J5, 1--- 3 J5, 5--- 7 J5, 9--- 10 J4, 1--- 3 J4, 5--- 6 J3, 1--- 3 J2, 1--- 2 50 Economizer Control Board (ECB) The ECB controls the economizer actuator. (See Fig. 18 and Table 20.) The control signal from the ECB uses either the MFT (Multi-Function Technology) digital communication protocol or a 4 to 20 mA output signal as defined by the configuration ConfigurationECONE.CTL. The ECB has inputs for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ), Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ), enthalpy and RH sensor. It also controls two power exhaust outputs. By digitally communicating with the ECB, the economizer actuator is able to provide the damper position and diagnostic information to the ComfortLink controller. The damper position is displayed at OutputsECONEC.AP. Diagnostic information is displayed via Alert T414. More information about these alarms is contained in the Alarms and Alerts section. IMPORTANT: The Economizer Control Board (ECB) has a 4-position DIP switch that is factory set to `0' (ON, towards the center of the board). Do not change this setting. 48/50PD Fig. 18 -- Economizer Control Board (ECB) C07027 51 DISPLAY NAME RM.OC ENTH or IAQ.S IAQ OAQ or SP.RH PE.1 PE.2 EC.CP EC.CP & EC.AP Table 20 ECB Connections POINT DESCRIPTION Input power from MBB Remote occupancy switch Outdoor enthalpy switch, or Indoor air quality switch Indoor air quality sensor Outdoor air quality sensor, or Relative humidity sensor Sensor Common Actuator Common Output power to enthalpy switch Output power for loop power sensors Output power to economizer actuator Power exhaust 1 relay Power exhaust 2 relay Commanded Economizer position Local Equipment Network (LEN) Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Economizer actuator position (digital control) SENSOR LOCATION INPUTS control box field installed economizer, or return/space return/space field installed OUTPUTS COMMUNICATION TYPE OF I/O 24 VAC switch input switch input 0--- 20 mA 0--- 20 mA Ground Ground 24 VAC 24 VDC 24 VAC relay relay 0--- 20 mA communication communication MFT communication CONNECTION PIN NUMBER J1, 1--- 2 J4, 2 J4, 4 J5, 2 J5, 5 J5, 3 J7, 3 J4, 3 J5, 1 J7, 2 J8, 3 J8, 6 J9, 1 J2, 1--- 3 J3 J7, 1 48/50PD 52 Modulation Board (AUX1) The AUX1 board controls the compressor capacity and the indoor fan speed (See Fig. 19 and Table 21.) It outputs a 1--5vdc and a 2--10vdc signal to the DSC and VFD for capacity and fan speed, respectively. This board is also used as the LEN connection buss for the ECB, therefore must be operational for the ECB to communicate. IMPORTANT: The AUX1 board has an 8--position DIP switch (S1) that is factory set for its LEN address. All the switches must be in the off position except 4, 5 and 7 which are on (off is towards the center of the board). Do not change this setting. 48/50PD Fig. 19 -- Modulation Board (AUX1) DISPLAY NAME CAPC F.SPD Table 21 AUX1 Connections POINT DESCRIPTION Input power from TRAN1 Compressor Capacity Commanded Fan Speed Local Equipment Network (LEN) Local Equipment Network (LEN) OUTPUTS COMMUNICATION TYPE OF I/O 24 VAC 1--- 5vdc 2--- 10vdc communication communication C08658 CONNECTION PIN NUMBER J1, 11--- 12 CH9 CH10 J9, 1--- 3 J9, 1--- 3 53 Digital Scroll Control Board (DSC) The DSC board controls the compressor's capacity. (See Fig. 20 and Table 22.) It receives a 1--5vdc signal from the AUX1 board determined by the cooling algorithm. The DSC has direct control of the compressor and pulses a solenoid unloader on and off to provide a specific capacity. The discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) is monitored by the DSC for compressor safety. The DSC is equipped with an LED (light--emitting diode) for diagnostics. See the troubleshooting section for more details. 48/50PD Fig. 20 -- Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) Table 22 DSC Connections DISPLAY NAME POINT DESCRIPTION CTLR CAPC Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr Compressor Discharge Temperature (DTT) Compressor Capacity Load Control Power* C.ALM CMP.A Scroll Compressor Alarm Compressor A Feedback Digital Scroll Unloader SENSOR LOCATION INPUTS Discharge line OUTPUTS Compressor section * Voltage used for contacts M1 & M2, U1 & U2, and V1 & V2 (24 VAC used). TYPE OF I/O 24 VAC 86k thermistor 1--- 5vdc 19--- 250VAC Relay Relay Relay C08659 CONNECTION PIN NUMBER 24VAC/24COM T1/T2 C1/C2 L1/L2 A1/A2 M1/M2 U1/U2 54 48/50PD Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) The VFD varies the frequency of the AC voltage supplied to the indoor fan. (See Fig. 21 and Table 23.) This causes the variance in the speed of the fan. The commanded fan speed is received by the VFD from the AUX1 board as a 2--10vdc signal. The AI1 DIP switch must be in the off (or towards "U") position to properly read the analog signal. There are three jumper wires that must remain installed for proper operation. The VFD is mounted behind the fan housing on the fan sled and the remote keypad is mounted on the front of the fan housing for easy access. The VFD is factory set to the auto mode for unit operation. Fig. 21 -- Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) C09146 Table 23 VFD Connections DISPLAY NAME POINT DESCRIPTION F.SPD LOW VOLTAGE INPUTS Shielded Cable Ground Commanded Fan Speed Analog Input 1 Common Low Voltage Power (jumped to DI1 & DI4) Low Voltage Common (jumped to DCOM) Discrete Inputs Common (jumped from GND) Discrete Input 1 (jumped from 24v) Discrete Input 4 (jumped from 24v) HIGH VOLTAGE Voltage Leg from IFC --- 21 Voltage Leg from IFC --- 22 Voltage Leg from IFC --- 23 Voltage Leg to IFM--- 3 Voltage Leg to IFM--- 2 Voltage Leg to IFM--- 1 * Requires the Al1 dip switch to be in in the Off (or towards "U") position. TYPE OF I/O Shield 2--- 10vdc Ground 24v Ground Ground Switch Input Switch Input Voltage Input Voltage Input Voltage Input Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage Output TERMINAL NUMBER 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 16 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 TERMINAL NAME SCR AI1* AGND 24v GND DCOM DI1 DI4 MAINS MAINS MAINS MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR 55 Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board The IGC is provided on gas heat units. (See Fig. 22 and Table 24.) The IGC controls the direct spark ignition system and monitors the rollout switch, limit switch, and induced-draft motor Hall Effect switch. RED LED-STATUS The IGC is equipped with an LED (light-emitting diode) for diagnostics. See the Troubleshooting section for more information. 48/50PD Fig. 22 -- Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board C07028 TERMINAL LABEL RT, C SS FS, T1 W RS LS CS L1, CM IFO GV (W1) GV (W2) Table 24 IGC Connections POINT DESCRIPTION Input power from TRAN 1 Speed sensor Flame sensor Heat stage 1 Rollout switch Limit switch Centrifugal switch (not used) Induced draft combustion motor Indoor fan request Gas valve (heat stage 1) Gas Valve (heat stage 2, from MBB) SENSOR LOCATION INPUTS control box gas section gas section MBB gas section gas section OUTPUTS gas section control box gas section gas section TYPE OF I/O CONNECTION PIN NUMBER 24 VAC analog input switch input 24 VAC switch input switch input switch input J1, 1--- 3 J2, 2 J2, 5--- 6 J2, 7--- 8 J2, 9--- 10 line VAC relay relay Not on IGC J2, 1 J2, 12 56 Low Voltage Terminal Strip (TB1) This circuit board provides a connection point between the major control boards and a majority of the field-installed accessories. (See Fig. 23 and Table 25.) The circuit breakers for the low voltage control transformers, interface connection for the Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) communication, and interface connection for the Local Equipment Network (LEN) communications are also located on the low voltage terminal strip. 48/50PD Fig. 23 -- Low--Voltage Terminal Board (LVTB) C08660 Table 25 Field Connection Terminal Strip TERMINAL LABEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8* 9 10* R Y1 Y2 W1 W2 G C X FIRE SHUTDOWN 1 FIRE SHUTDOWN 2 T55 1--- 2 T55 2--- 3 FAN STATUS 1--- 2 LEN CCN DISPLAY NAME IAQ OAQ or SP.RH RM.OC ENTH or IAQ.S EC.CP EC.AP HUM ALRM POINT DESCRIPTION 24 VDC Sensor Loop power Indoor air quality sensor Air quality & humidity sensor common Outdoor air quality sensor or Relative humidity sensor Remote occupancy switch Switch power (ENTH, RM.OC, IAQ.S) Outdoor enthalpy switch, or Indoor air quality switch Economizer commanded position actuator (when in digital control) Economizer signal common Economizer position feedback (when in analog control) 24 VAC power NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED Space Humidity Switch NOT USED 24 VAC common Alarm output (normally open) FDWN Fire shutdown switch 24 VAC output FDWN SPT SPTO Fire shutdown switch input Space temperature (T55/56) Space temperature offset (T56) NOT USED Local Equipment Network (LEN) Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) * Refer to Third Party Control section for more information SENSOR LOCATION return/space field installed field installed economizer, or return/space economizer economizer space supply/return supply/return space space TYPE OF I/O 24 VDC output 4--- 20 mA input Ground 4--- 20 mA input 24 VAC input 24 VAC output 24 VAC input 2--- 10 VDC output Ground communication 2--- 10 VDC output 24 VAC output 24 VAC input 24 VAC output 24 VAC output switch input CONNECTION PIN NUMBER J10, 17 J10, 16 J10, 15 J10, 14 J10, 13 J10, 11--- 12 J10, 9--- 10 J10, 6--- 8 J10, 3--- 5 J10, 1--- 2 J11, 11--- 14 J11,10 J11, 9 J11, 7--- 8 J11, 6 J11, 5 J11, 2--- 4 J11, 1 J12, 7 switch input 10k thermistor 10k thermistor communication communication J12, 6 J12, 4--- 5 J12, 3--- 4 J12, 1--- 2 J13, 1--- 3, 4--- 5 J13, 6--- 8, 4--- 5 57 48/50PD Scrolling Marquee Display This device is the keypad interface used to access rooftop information, read sensor values, and test the unit. (See Fig. 24.) The Scrolling Marquee display is a 4-key, 4-character, 16-segment LED (light-emitting diode) display. Eleven mode LEDs are located on the display as well as an Alarm Status LED. See Basic Control Usage section for further details. MODE Run Status Service Test Temperature Pressures Setpoints Inputs Alarm Status Outputs Configuration Time Clock ESCAPE Operating Modes Alarms ENTER Fig. 24 -- Scrolling Marquee C06320 Accessory Navigatort Display The accessory hand-held Navigator display can be used with 48/50PD units. (See Fig. 25.) The Navigator display operates the same way as the Scrolling Marquee device. The Navigator display plugs into the LEN port on either TB or the ECB board. C o N m AV f I ortLi G AT O R n k SLEETWWITMTPTE 4454144.2.0.1.6°5°F°F8F MODE Run Status PTreeSsmesrpuveircereastTueresst Setpoints Inputs Alarm Status Outputs TCimoenfCigloucraktion Operating Alarms Modes ESC ENTER Fig. 25 -- Accessory Navigatort Display C06321 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)R Interface The units can be connected to the CCN if desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is field supplied and installed. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. (See Fig. 26.) The positive pin of each system element communication connector must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on either side of it. This is also required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at TB. (See Fig. 26.) Consult the CCN Contractor's Manual for further information. IMPORTANT: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gauge) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of --20_C to 60_C is required. See Table below for acceptable wiring. MANUFACTURER Alpha Belden Carol West Penn PART NO. 2413 or 5463 8772 C2528 302 It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus that a color-coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive, black for the signal negative and white for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different colored wires. At each system element, the shields of its communication bus cables must be tied together. The shield screw on TB1 can be used to tie the cables together. If the communication bus is entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only. The shield screw on TB1 is not acceptable for grounding. If the communication bus cable exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to the network: 1. Turn off power to the control box. 2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white (ground), and black (--) conductors. (Substitute appropriate colors for different colored cables). 3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on TB1, the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the (--) terminal. 4. The RJ14 CCN connector on TB1 can also be used, but is only intended for temporary connection (for example, a laptop computer running Carrier network software). 5. Restore power to unit. IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the bus. Field-Installed Accessories Space Temperature Sensor (T- 55) The T--55 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is a field-installed accessory. The sensor is installed on a building interior wall to measure room air temperature. The T--55 sensor also includes an override button on the front cover to permit occupants to override the Unoccupied Schedule (if programmed). TB1--T55--1 . . . . . . . . Sensor Input TB1--T55--2 . . . . . . . . Sensor Common Space Temperature Sensor (T- 56) The T--56 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT56SPT) is a field-installed accessory. This sensor includes a sliding scale on the front cover that permits an occupant to adjust the space temperature set point remotely. The T--56 sensor also includes an override button on the front cover to allow occupants to override the unoccupied schedule (if programmed). TB1--T55--1 . . . . . . . . Sensor Input TB1--T55--2 . . . . . . . . Sensor Common TB1--T55--3 . . . . . . . . Setpoint Offset Input 58 48/50PD Space Temperature Sensor (T- 58) The T--58 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT58SPT) is a field-installed accessory. The T--58 sensor communicates with the ComfortLinkTM controller, providing space temperature, heating and cooling set points, and mode operation information. Refer to the T--58 installation instructions for information on installing and configuring the T--58 sensor. CCN BUS Each T--58 sensor must have a unique address on the CCN. Each T--58 sensor must also be configured with the address of the unit control it is communicating to. Space Temperature Sensor Averaging See Fig. 27 for space temperature averaging with T--55 sensors only. If the use of one T--56 sensor is required, refer to Fig. 28. BUILDING SUPERVISOR ROOFTOP UNIT CL ROOFTOP UNIT CL NETWORK OPTIONS REMOTE CCN SITE AUTODIAL GATEWAY NON CARRIER HVAC EQUIPMENT COMFORT CONTROLLER ROOFTOP UNIT CL ROOFTOP UNIT CL TERMINAL SYSTEM MANAGER HEATING/COOLING UNITS CL ROOFTOP UNIT TCU DAV AIR TERMINAL TCU DAV AIR TERMINAL LEGEND CCN -- Carrier Comfort Networkr CL -- ComfortLinkt Controls DAV -- Digital Air Volume HVAC -- Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditoning TCU -- Terminal Control Unit TO ADDITIONAL TERMINALS TCU DAV FAN POWERED MIXING BOX AIR DISTRIBUTION-DIGITAL AIR VOLUME CONTROL (DAV) Fig. 26 -- CCN System Architecture C07030 59 TB1-T55 1 2 RED BLK TO MAIN BASE BOARD RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK 48/50PD SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3 SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING --4 T-55 SENSOR APPLICATION TB1-T55 1 2 TO MAIN BASE BOARD RED BLK LEGEND TB -- Terminal Block ______ -- Factory Wiring _ _ _ _ -- Field Wiring BLK RED SENSOR 1 SENSOR 4 RED BLK RED BLK SENSOR 2 SENSOR 5 RED BLK RED BLK BLK RED TB1-T55 1 2 TO MAIN BASE BOARD RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK SENSOR 7 SENSOR 8 SPACE TEMPERATURE AVERAGING --9 T-55 SENSOR APPLICATION Fig. 27 -- Space Temperature Sensor Averaging RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK SENSOR 4 SENSOR 3 SENSOR 6 SENSOR 9 C07032 TB1-T55 3 TO MAIN BASE BOARD T-55 SENSOR 1 T-55 SENSOR 2 T-55 SENSOR 3 WHT T-56 SENSOR 4 Fig. 28 -- Space Temperature Sensor Averaging with 3 T--55 Sensors and One T--56 Sensor 60 C07033 Carrier Accessory Kits There are specific accessory kits sold for various field installed accessories. These kits vary based on model, size, voltage, manufacture date, and duct orientation. Some of these kits include Economizer, Power Exhaust, and Electric Heat. Refer to the Controls Quick Set--Up section for configuration and more information on these accessories. Two- Position Damper The two-position outdoor air damper accessory usage depends on model size and return duct orientation. This accessory wires directly into the low voltage circuit for the indoor fan control. No other control configuration is needed. Indoor Air Quality The indoor air quality (IAQ) sensor (part no. 33ZCSENCO2) is a field-installed accessory which measures CO2 levels in the air. When installing this sensor, an ECB board must be installed and the unit must be configured for IAQ use by setting ConfigurationAIR.QIA.CF to a value of 1, 2, or 3. See the Indoor Air Quality section for more information. TB1--2 . . . . . . . 4--20 mA Input TB1--3 . . . . . . . Sensor Common TB1--R . . . . . . 24 VAC Output TB1--C . . . . . . Common (GND) Outdoor Air Quality The outdoor air quality (OAQ) sensor is a field-installed accessory that measures CO2 levels in the air. When installing this sensor, an ECB board must be installed and the unit must be configured for OAQ use by setting ConfigurationAIR.QOA.CF to a value of 1 or 2. See the Indoor Air Quality section for more information. TB1--4 . . . . . . . 4--20 mA Input TB1--3 . . . . . . . Sensor Common TB1--R . . . . . . 24 VAC Output TB1--C . . . . . . Common (GND) Smoke Detectors The smoke detectors are field-installed accessories. These detectors can detect smoke in either the return air (part no. CRSMKDET003A00) or supply and return air (part no. CRSMKSUP002A00). When installing either detector, the unit must be configured for fire shutdown by setting ConfigurationUNITFS.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2). TB1--Fire Shutdown--1 . . . . Dry Contact Source TB1--Fire Shutdown--2 . . . . Discrete Input to Board TB1--R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 VAC Output TB1--C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common (GND) Filter Status The filter status accessory (part no. CRSTATUS002B00) is a field-installed accessory. This accessory detects plugged filters. When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for filter status by setting ConfigurationUNITFL.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the preferred configuration. Filter status wires are pre-run in the unit harness and located near the switch installation location. Refer to the Filter Accessory Installation Instructions for more information. Fan Status The fan status accessory (part no. CRSTATUS003B00) is a field-installed accessory. This accessory detects when the indoor fan is blowing air. When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for fan status by setting ConfigurationUNITFN.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the preferred configuration. Fan status wires are pre-run in the unit harness and located near the switch installation location. Refer to the Fan Accessory Installation Instructions for more information. IMPORTANT: The Fan Status terminals on TB1 are NOT to be used. Enthalpy Sensors The enthalpy accessories (part no. CRENTSNG002A00 and CRENTDIF002A00) are field-installed accessories. The first accessory (outdoor air only) determines when the enthalpy is low relative to a fixed reference. Adding the second accessory (return air) compares the enthalpy between the outdoor and return airstreams. In each case, the enthalpy 4 to 20 mA signals are converted to a switch output which is read by the ECB. When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for enthalpy-based control by setting ConfigurationECONEN.SW to normally open (1). Normal status is an active switch which tells the control that enthalpy is LOW. The actual switch terminal LOW is normally closed. Refer to the Enthalpy Kit Installation Instructions for more information on its installation. Return/Supply Air Temperature Sensor The temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCSENSAT) is a field-installed accessory which may be installed on the common return air duct and/or the common supply air duct near the unit. The duct supply air temperature (SAT) may be used to replace the SAT sensor that is internal to the unit. A supply duct SAT measurement is valid for heating mode display while the factory-standard internal SAT is not valid for heating due to its location upstream of the heating section. When installing the supply duct SAT, the unit must be configured by setting ConfigurationUNITSAT.H to ENBL. A SAT sensor in the supply duct is the preferred configuration for systems with Carrier variable volume and temperature (VVT®) accessory controls. Space Humidistat The Space Humidistat (part no. ----HL----38MG--029) is a wall mounted device with an adjustable setpoint to control humidity levels. The humidistat input is provided on the field connection terminal board. The Space Humidity Switch configuration, ConfigurationUNITRH.SW, identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input at LOW humidity. TB1--R . . . . . . 24 VAC Dry Contact Source TB1--W2 . . . . . Discrete Input to Board Space Humidity Sensor The space relative humidity sensor (part no. 33ZCSENDRH--01 duct mount or 33ZCSENSRH--01 wall mount) is a field--installed accessory. The space relative humidity (RHS) may be selected for use if the outdoor air quality sensor (OAQ) is not used and an economizer board is installed. When installing the relative humidity sensor, the unit must be configured by setting ConfigurationUNITRH.S to YES. TB1--1 . . . . . . . 24 VDC Loop Power TB1--4 . . . . . . . 4--20 mA Input Signal SERVICE ! WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury or death. Before performing service or maintenance operations on unit, turn off main power switch to unit and install lockout tag. Ensure electrical service to rooftop unit agrees with voltage and amperage listed on the unit rating plate. 61 48/50PD 48/50PD ! WARNING UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury, death and/or equipment damage. Puronr (R--410A) refrigerant systems operate at higher pressures than standard R--22 systems. Do not use R--22 service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment. ! WARNING FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury, death and/or property damage. 1. Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, or maintenance can cause property damage, personal injury, or loss of life. Refer to the User's Information Manual provided with this unit for more details. 2. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. What to do if you smell gas: 1. DO NOT try to light any appliance. 2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any phone in your building. 3. IMMEDIATELY call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. 4. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. ! WARNING FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Disconnect gas piping from unit when pressure testing at pressure greater than 0.5 psig. Pressures greater than 0.5 psig will cause gas valve damage resulting in hazardous condition. If gas valve is subjected to pressure greater than 0.5 psig, it must be replaced before use. When pressure testing field-supplied gas piping at pressures of 0.5 psig or less, a unit connected to such piping must be isolated by closing the manual gas valve(s). Cleaning Inspect unit interior at beginning of each heating and cooling season and as operating conditions require. Remove unit top panel and/or side panels for access to unit interior. Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendation Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. The following maintenance and cleaning procedures are recommended as part of the routine maintenance activities to extend the life of the coil. Remove Surface Loaded Fibers Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with a vacuum cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non-metallic bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be applied in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin edges can be easily bent over and damage to the coating of a protected coil) if the tool is applied across the fins. NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose, against a surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the coil. This will make cleaning efforts more difficult. Surface loaded fibers must be completely removed prior to using low velocity clean water rinse. Periodic Clean Water Rinse A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coils that are applied in coastal or industrial environments. However, it is very important that the water rinse is made with very low velocity water stream to avoid damaging the fin edges. Monthly cleaning as described below is recommended. Routine Cleaning of Round--Tube Coil Surfaces Monthly cleaning with Totaline® environmentally sound coil cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. This cleaner is available from Carrier Replacement parts division as part number P902--0301 for a one gallon container, and part number P902--0305 for a 5 gallon container. It is recommended that all round--tube coils, including standard aluminum, pre-coated, copper/copper or E-coated coils be cleaned with the Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner as described below. Coil cleaning should be part of the unit's regularly scheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life of the coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced durability in the environment. Avoid the use of: S coil brighteners S acid cleaning prior to painting S high pressure washers S poor quality water for cleaning Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner is non-flammable, hypoallergenic, non--bacterial, and a USDA accepted biodegradable agent that will not harm the coil or surrounding components such as electrical wiring, painted metal surfaces, or insulation. Use of non-recommended coil cleaners is strongly discouraged since coil and unit durability could be affected. Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Equipment S 21/2 gallon garden sprayer S water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle Application ! CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in corrosion and damage to the unit. Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic cleaners should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of any kind. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube interface where dissimilar materials are in contact. If there is dirt below the surface of the coil, use the Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner as described above. 62 ! CAUTION UNIT RELIABILITY HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in reduced unit performance. High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose, or compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and increase airside pressure drop. Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application Instructions 1. Proper eye protection such as safety glasses is recommended during mixing and application. 2. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacuum cleaner as described above. 3. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend fins. 4. Mix Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner in a 21/2 gallon garden sprayer according to the instructions included with the cleaner. The optimum solution temperature is 100_F. IMPORTANT: Do NOT use water in excess of 130_F, as the enzymatic activity will be destroyed. 5. Thoroughly apply Totaline® environmentally sound coil cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including finned area, tube sheets and coil headers. 6. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and apply cleaner with a vertical, up-and-down motion. Avoid spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize potential for fin damage. 7. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned areas. 8. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly cleaned. 9. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solution for 10 minutes. 10. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing. Reapplying cleaner as needed to ensure 10-minute saturation is achieved. 11. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean water using downward rinsing motion of water spray nozzle. Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle. Condensate Drain Pan Check and clean each year at the start of the cooling season. In winter, keep drains and traps dry. To clean the condensate pan: 1. Disconnect condensate drain system from side or bottom drain connection. 2. Remove and clean trap. 3. Remove 4 screws securing condensate pan access cover to unit. Save screws and panel. 4. Slide condensate pan out from unit and clean. Pan is made of non-corrosive plastic. Use a mild cleaner to remove heavy deposits of dirt and grime. 5. Replace pan in unit. 6. Replace condensate pan access cover with 4 screws saved from Step 3. 7. Re-attach and prime condensate trap. 8. Connect condensate drainage system. ROLLOUT SWITCH INDUCED DRAFT MOTOR COMBUSTION FAN HOUSING HEAT EXCHANGER SECTION MAIN GAS VALVE MAIN BURNER SECTION Fig. 29 -- Typical Gas Heating Section C07037 Filters Clean or replace at start of each heating and cooling season, or more often if operating conditions require. Refer to unit Installation Instructions for type and size. Outdoor- Air Inlet Screens Clean screens with steam or hot water and a mild detergent. Do not use throwaway filters in place of screens. See unit installation instructions for quantity and size. Main Burner (48PD) At the beginning of each heating season, inspect for deterioration or blockage due to corrosion or other causes. Observe the main burner flames. Refer to Main Burners section. Flue Gas Passageways (48PD) The flue collector box and heat exchanger cells may be inspected by opening heat section access door, flue box cover, and main burner assembly. (See Fig. 29.) Refer to Main Burners section for burner removal sequence. If cleaning is required, clean tubes with a wire brush. Use Caution with ceramic heat exchanger baffles. When installing retaining clip, be sure the center leg of the clip extends inward toward baffle. (See Fig. 30.) CERAMIC BAFFLE CLIP NOTE: One baffle and clip will be in each upper tube of the heat exchanger. Fig. 30 -- Removing Heat Exchanger Ceramic Baffles and Clips C07260 Combustion- Air Blower (48PD) Clean periodically to assure proper airflow and heating efficiency. Inspect blower wheel every fall and periodically during heating season. For the first heating season, inspect blower wheel bi-monthly to determine proper cleaning frequency. 63 48/50PD 48/50PD To inspect blower wheel, open heat section door. Using a flashlight, look into the flue exhaust duct to inspect. If cleaning is required, remove motor and wheel assembly by removing the screws holding the flue box cover to the flue box. Remove the screws holding the inducer housing to the inlet plate. The wheel can then be removed from the motor shaft and cleaned with a detergent or solvent. Replace the wheel onto the motor shaft in the correct position and reassemble the flue cover onto the flue box. Lubrication Compressors Each compressor is charged with the correct amount of oil at the factory. ! CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to unit components. The compressor is in a Puron refrigerant system and uses a polyolester (POE) oil. This oil is extremely hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. Polyolester (POE) compressor lubricants are known to cause long term damage to some synthetic roofing materials. Exposure, even if immediately cleaned up, may cause roofing materials to become brittle (leading to cracking) within a year. When performing any service which may risk exposure of compressor oil to the roof, take appropriate precautions to protect roofing. Procedures which risk oil leakage include compressor replacement, repairing refrigerant leaks, and replacing refrigerant components. To prepare rooftop: 1. Cover extended roof work area with an impermeable plastic dropcloth or tarp. Make sure a 10 x 10 ft area around the work area is covered. 2. Cover area in front of the unit service panel with a terry cloth shop towel to absorb lubricant spills and prevent run-offs. Towel will also protect dropcloth from tears caused by tools or components. 3. Place terry cloth shop towel inside the unit directly under components to be serviced to prevent spills through the bottom of the unit. 4. Perform the required service. 5. Remove an dispose of any oil contaminated material per local codes. Indoor Fan Shaft Bearings The indoor fan has permanently sealed bearings. No field lubrication is necessary. Condenser and Evaporator- Fan Motor Bearings The condenser-fan and evaporator-fan motors have permanently sealed bearings, so no field lubrication is necessary. Economizer or Manual Outside Air Damper If blade adjustment is required, refer to unit or accessory installation instructions. Evaporator Fan Service and Replacement The units feature a slide-out fan deck for easy servicing of the indoor-fan motor, pulleys, belt, bearings and VFD. To service components in this section, perform the following procedure: 1. Turn off unit power. 2. Open the fan section access door. 3. Remove two no. 10 screws at front of slide-out fan deck. Save screws. (See Fig. 31.) 4. Disconnect the electrical wires connected to the slide--out fan deck (supply air thermistor and fan status switch if installed). Wires may be damaged if not disconnected. 5. Fan deck can now be slid out to access serviceable components. ! CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to the unit. DO NOT SLIDE FAN DECK OUT PAST THE FAN DECK STOP. If further access is required, the fan deck must be supported. Make sure plugs and wiring are not pinched between fan housing and unit sheet metal post. 6. To replace fan deck to operating position, slide fan deck back into the unit. Secure with the two no. 10 screws removed in Step 3. 7. Re-attach electrical wires. 8. Close fan section access door. 9. Restore power to unit. C08661 Fig. 31 -- Evaporator--Fan Motor Adjustment Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment Fan motor pulleys are factory set for speed shown in Appendix D. To change fan speeds: 1. Shut off unit power supply. 2. Loosen nuts on the 4 carriage bolts in the mounting base. Using adjusting bolts and plate, slide motor and remove belt. 3. Loosen movable-pulley flange setscrew. (See Fig. 32.) 4. Screw movable flange toward fixed flange to increase speed and away from fixed flange to decrease speed. Increasing fan speed increases load on motor. Do not exceed maximum speed specified in Appendix D. See Appendix D for air quantity limits. 5. Set movable flange at nearest keyway of pulley hub and tighten setscrew. (See Appendix D for speed change for each full turn of pulley flange.) 6. Replace belts. 64 48/50PD 7. Realign fan and motor pulleys: a. Loosen fan pulley setscrews. b. Slide fan pulley along fan shaft. c. Make angular alignment by loosening motor from mounting plate. 8. Tighten belts. 9. Restore power to unit. C06041 Fig. 32 -- Evaporator--Fan Alignment and Adjustment Evaporator Fan Belt Tension Adjustment To adjust belt tension: 1. Turn off unit power. 2. Slide out fan deck to service position as shown in Evaporator Fan Service and Replacement section above. 3. Loosen motor mounting plate bolts. 4. Move motor mounting plate to adjust to proper belt tension. Motor adjuster bolts may be used to tighten belts. (See Fig. 31.) Do not overtighten belt. 5. Check for proper belt alignment. Adjust if necessary. 6. Tighten motor mounting plate bolts to lock motor in proper position. 7. Return fan deck back into operating position. 8. Restore power to unit. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Replacement The 48/50PD units are equipped with a VFD that is mounted behind the blower housing on the fan sled. The VFD's remote display is mounted on the front of the fan housing for easier access. The VFD is mounted to a plate which is mounted to the fan sled. When accessing the VFD or to remove the VFD, follow the Evaporator fan service and replacement Steps 1--5 and the following steps: IMPORTANT: If fan deck stop screws are removed for further access, the front of the fan deck MUST BE SUPPORTED. 1. Remove the 2 screws holding the VFD's mount bracket to the fan sled. The horizontal cross section of the bottom half of the mount bracket is shown on Fig. 33. 2. Cut the wire ties holding the VFD power wires to the fan housing and the two wire ties holding the control wires to the VFD display/keypad at the top of the fan scroll. 3. With the VFD still attached, remove the mount bracket from the fan sled. To do this requires a slight lift on the screw side then a push towards the pulley side of the fan sled. (See Fig. 33.) Lift out the bracket when the pulley side is clear from the fan sled. 4. With all the wires stilled attached to the VFD, turn the VFD assembly so it is parallel with the fan sled. 5. Pull the VFD assembly to the front of the fan sled and place in a secure flat surface. 6. Disconnect the power, ground, RJ45, and control wiring to the VFD making sure to note their connections. IMPORTANT: Wires are marked with VFD terminal labels and wiring diagram shows the wiring connections. 7. Remove the 4 screws holding the VFD to the mount bracket and remove the VFD. 8. Remove the replacement VFD cover and install jumper wires provided with it as shown on the unit wiring diagram. If jumpers are not provided with the replacement VFD, remove them from the defective one or field supply the jumpers. 9. Set AI1 and AI2 DIP switches to the U (off) direction as indicated on the plastic housing near the DIP switch. 10. Replace the VFD with the new one. 11. Install the 4 screws in the VFD to secure it to the mounting bracket. 12. Connect the wiring as it was on the previous VFD, refer to the wiring diagram. 13. Move the VFD assembly to the back of the fan sled. 14. Turn the VFD assembly lengthwise with the fan housing, making sure the screw side of the bracket lines up with the screw holes on the fan sled. 15. Make sure the bracket s pulley side U bend is clear of the fan sled and pull the assembly towards the screw side. 16. Install the 2 screws in the bracket to secure it to the fan sled. 17. Secure power and control wires with new wire ties. 18. Follow the Evaporator fan service and replacement Steps 6--9. 19. Power up VFD and set up its parameters per Table 40 in Appendix B. IMPORTANT: If fan deck stops were removed, they must be reinstalled. For VFD service and maintenance, refer to Appendix B. C08662 Fig. 33 -- VFD Mount Bracket Cross Section 65 48/50PD Condenser-Fan Adjustment 1. Shut off unit power supply. 2. Remove condenser-fan assembly (grille, motor, motor cover, and fan) and loosen fan hub setscrews. 3. Adjust fan height as shown in Fig. 34. 4. Tighten setscrews and replace condenser-fan assembly. 5. Turn on power to unit. Fig. 34 -- Condenser--Fan Adjustment C08570 Verify Sensor Performance Verify that thermistor, transducer, and switch inputs are reading correctly. These values can be accessed through the Scrolling Marquee display in the Temperatures, Pressures, and Inputs menus. Some values will depend on configuration choices. Refer to the Control Set Up Checklist completed for the specific unit installation and to the configuration tables in Appendix A. Economizer Operation During Power Failure Dampers have a spring return. In event of power failure, dampers will return to fully closed position until power is restored. Do not manually operate damper motor. Evacuation Proper evacuation of the system will remove noncondensables and ensure a tight, dry system before charging. Evacuate from both high and low side ports. Never use the system compressor as a vacuum pump. Refrigerant tubes and indoor coil should be evacuated to 500 microns. Always break a vacuum with dry nitrogen. The two possible methods are the deep vacuum method and the triple evacuation method. Deep Vacuum Method The deep vacuum method requires a vacuum pump capable of pulling a minimum vacuum of 500 microns and a vacuum gauge capable of accurately measuring this vacuum depth. The deep vacuum method is the most positive way of assuring a system is free of air and liquid water. (See Fig. 35.) MICRONS 5000 4500 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 LEAK IN SYSTEM VACUUM TIGHT TOO WET TIGHT DRY SYSTEM 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 MINUTES Fig. 35 -- Deep Vacuum Graph C06264 Triple Evacuation Method The triple evacuation method should only be used when vacuum pump is capable of pumping down to 28--in. of mercury and system does not contain any liquid water. Proceed as follows: 1. Pump system down to 28--in. of mercury and allow pump to continue operating for an additional 15 minutes. 2. Close service valves and shut off vacuum pump. 3. Connect a nitrogen cylinder and regulator to system and open until system pressure is 2 psig. 4. Close service valve and allow system to stand for 1 hr. During this time, dry nitrogen will be able to diffuse throughout the system, absorbing moisture. 5. Repeat this procedure. System will then contain minimal amounts of contaminants and water vapor. Refrigerant Charge Amount of refrigerant charge is listed on unit nameplate. Refer to Carrier GTAC II; Module 5; Charging, Recovery, Recycling, and Reclamation section for charging methods and procedures. Unit panels must be in place when unit is operating during charging procedure. Puron® (R-410A) refrigerant systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a commercial type metering device in the manifold hose. ! WARNING UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury, death and/or equipment damage. Puron (R--410A) refrigerant systems operate at higher pressures than standard R--22 systems. Do not use R--22 service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment. Gauge set, hoses, and recovery system must be designed to handle Puron refrigerant. If unsure about equipment, consult the equipment manufacturer. IMPORTANT: Do not use recycled refrigerant as it may contain contaminants. No Charge in the System Use standard evacuating techniques. After evacuating system, weigh in the specified amount of refrigerant (refer to unit nameplate). Verify charge using the charging chart via "Charge in the System." Charge in the System IMPORTANT: The circuit must be running in normal cooling mode with the compressor capacity at 100%. The VFD must be running at max fan speed and indoor airflow must be within specified air quantity limits for cooling (See Appendix D). All outdoor fans must be on and running at high speed. Use the Cooling Service Test Outdoor Fan Override function to start all outdoor fans. An accurate pressure gauge and temperature--sensing device is required. Charging is accomplished by ensuring the proper amount of liquid subcooling. Connect pressure gauge to the compressor discharge service valve. Connect temperature sensing device to the liquid line between the condenser and the TXV (thermostatic expansion valve), and insulate it so that ambient temperature does not affect reading. Use the cooling charging chart (Fig. 36--37) to determine if additional charge is needed or if some charge needs to be removed from the system. 66 48/50PD To Use the Cooling Charging Chart Use the temperature and pressure readings, and find the intersection point on the cooling charging chart. If intersection point on chart is above line, add refrigerant. If intersection point on chart is below line, carefully recover some of the charge. Recheck suction pressure as charge is adjusted. The TXV is set to maintain between 10 and 15 degrees of superheat at the compressors. The valves are factory set and cannot be adjusted. Do not use A TXV designed for use with R--22. R410A REFRIGERANT OUTDOOR FAN M UST BE OPERATING ON HIGH SPEED 160 140 Outdoor Coil Leaving Temp erature, [Degrees F] 120 Add Charge if Above the Curve 100 80 Rem ove Charge if Below the Curve 60 40 20 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 Compre ssor Disc ha rge P re ssure , [psig] Fig. 36 -- Charging Chart 48/50PD05 C07040 R410A REFRIGERANT OUTDOOR FAN M UST BE OPERATING ON HIGH SPEED 160 140 Outdoor Coil Leaving Temp erature, [Degrees F] 120 Add Charge if Above the Curve 100 80 Rem ove Charge if Below the Curve 60 40 20 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 Compre ssor Disc ha rge P re ssure , [psig] Fig. 37 -- Charging Chart 48/50PD06 C07041 PuronR Refrigerant Puron refrigerant operates at 50 to 70 percent higher pressures than R-22. Be sure that servicing equipment and replacement components are designed to operate with Puron refrigerant. Do not mix with components that have been used with other refrigerants. Puron refrigerant, as with other HFCs, is only compatible with POE oils. Recovery cylinder service pressure rating must be 400 psig. Puron systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a commercial-type metering device in the manifold hose. Manifold sets should be 750 psig high-side and 200 psig low-side with 520 psig low-side retard. Use hoses with 750 psig service pressure rating. Leak detectors should be designed to detect HFC refrigerant. Table 26 Altitude Compensation* 48PG03--07 ELEVATION (ft) 0-1,999 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000 9,000 10,000 11,000 12,000 13,000 14,000 NATURAL GAS ORIFICE 45 47 47 47 48 48 48 49 49 50 51 51 52 52 PROPANE ORIFICE 52 52 53 53 53 53 53 54 54 54 54 55 55 56 *As the height above sea level increases, there is less oxygen per cubic foot of air. Therefore, heat input rate should be reduced at higher altitudes. Includes a 4% input reduction per each 1000 ft. Orifices available through your Carrier dealer. Gas Valve Adjustment (48PD Units Only) The gas valve opens and closes in response to the thermostat or limit control. When power is supplied to valve terminals W2 (High Fire) and C1, the main valve opens to its preset position. The regular factory setting is stamped on the valve body. To adjust regulator: 1. Set unit at setting for no call for heat. 2. Turn main gas valve to OFF position. 3. Remove 1/8-in. pipe plug from manifold pressure tap connection. Install a suitable pressure-measuring device. 4. Set main gas valve to ON position. 5. Set thermostat at setting to call for heat. 6. Remove screw cap covering regulator adjustment screw. (See Fig. 38.) 7. Turn adjustment screw clockwise to increase pressure or counterclockwise to decrease pressure. The setting is 3.50 in. wg on sizes 03-14 and 3.00 on size 16--28. 67 48/50PD 8. Once desired pressure is established, set unit setting for no call for heat, turn off main gas valve, remove pressure-measuring device, and replace 1/8-in. pipe plug and screw cap. Fig. 38 -- 48PD Gas Valve C08663 High Altitude (48PD Units Only) For high altitude applications greater than 2,000 ft the heat input rate should be reduced. The higher the altitude is above sea level, the less oxygen is in the air. See Table 7 for orifice sizing. A high altitude kit is available to convert unit for altitudes up to 7,000 ft. Main Burners (48PD Units Only) For all applications, main burners are factory set and should require no adjustment. E Main Burner Removal 1. Shut off (field-supplied) manual main gas valve. 2. Shut off power to unit. 3. Open gas section access door. 4. Disconnect gas piping from gas valve inlet. 5. Remove wires from gas valve. 6. Remove wires from rollout switch. 7. Remove sensor wire and ignitor cable from IGC board. 8. Remove 2 screws that hold the burner assembly to vestibule plate. 9. Rotate the burner/manifold assembly to the right, away from the flue extension and lift burner/manifold assembly out of unit. Cleaning and Adjustment 1. Remove burner rack from unit as described in Main Burner Removal section above. 2. Inspect burners, and if dirty, remove burners from rack. The two outer burners have the flame crossover closed off in order to prevent gas flow from exiting the sides of the burner assembly. To prevent ignition problems, make sure the outer burners are returned to their original position when done servicing. 3. Using a soft brush, clean burners and crossover port as required. 4. Adjust spark gap. (See Fig. 39.) 5. Reinstall burners on rack. 6. Reinstall burner rack as described above. A A E B SPARK GAP 0.181" [4.6] C 25.4 MAX. TYP. B SECTION E-E SCALE 2:1 D SPARK GAP 0.120 TO 0.140" [3.05 TO 3.56] SECTION C-C C D SECTION A-A SCALE 1:1 SECTION B-B SCALE 1:1 Fig. 39 -- Spark Gap Adjustment SECTION D-D C06269 68 48/50PD Filter Drier Replace filter drier whenever refrigerant system is exposed to atmosphere. Only use factory specified liquid-line filter driers with working pressures no less than 650 psig. Do not install a suction-line filter drier in liquid line. A liquid-line filter drier designed for use with Puron® refrigerant is required on every unit. Protective Devices Compressor Rotation Overcurrent Each compressor has internal line break motor protection. Overtemperature Each compressor has an internal protector to protect it against excessively high discharge gas temperatures. High--Pressure Switch If the high-pressure switch trips, the compressor will shut down and the current sensor (3-phase units only) will not detect current. See the Current Sensor section below for more information. Current Sensor (CS) (3--Phase Units Only) The purpose of the CS is to detect losses in compressor power. After detecting a loss in compressor power, unit control locks out the compressor for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, the alarm will automatically reset. If this alarm occurs 3 times consecutively, the compressor will remain locked out until an alarm reset is initiated via CCN or manually via the Scrolling Marquee display (see Alarms and Alerts section for more details). IMPORTANT: The current sensor is not currently used in the 48/50PD, but reserved for future implementation. Evaporator Fan Motor Protection Indoor-fan motors less than 5 hp are equipped with internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection. Protection devices reset automatically. Disconnect and lock out power when servicing motor. Indoor-fan motors 5 hp and larger are equipped with a manual reset, calibrated trip, magnetic circuit breaker and overcurrent protection. Do not bypass connections or increase the size of the breaker to correct trouble. Determine the cause and correct it before resetting the breaker. Condenser- Fan Motor Protection Each condenser-fan motor is internally protected against overtemperature. Fuses are located in the control box and feed power to the condenser fan motors. Always replace blown fuses with the correct size fuse as indicated on the unit fuse label. Saturated Suction Pressure (SSP) If the SSP for a particular circuit is reading below the alarm set point for an extended period of time, that circuit will be shut down. After 15 minutes, the alarm will automatically reset. If this alarm occurs 3 times consecutively, the circuit will remain locked out until an alarm reset is initiated via CCN or manually via the Scrolling Marquee display (see Alarms and Alerts section for more details). Relief Devices All units have relief devices to protect against damage from excessive pressures (i.e., fire). These devices protect the high and low side and are located at the suction line service port. Protect joint during brazing operations near joint. Compressor Sound Shield The 48/50PD units are equipped with a compressor sound shield. The sound shield has two parts, the compressor jacket encloses the shell of the compressor and the base shield is installed between the bottom of the compressor and the unit base pan. The sound shield reduces the difference in noise levels as the compressor loads and unloads in the frequency ranges of 200 to 2000 Hz. Since the human speech occurs in the 200 to 2000 Hz frequency ranges the sound shield reduces the speech annoyance caused by the loading and unloading of the compressor. The compressor jacket is held closed around the compressor by Velcro tape. To remove the compressor jacket, separate the Velcro along the side and top of the compressor. Slide the jacket toward the back of the compressor to remove the jacket. Make sure the jacket is reinstalled after servicing or replacing the compressor. The compressor base shield is accessible when the compressor is removed. To remove the base shield without removing the compressor, remove one front compressor mounting bolt and grommet. At the three remaining compressor mounting grommets, cut the sound shield so that the base shield can be slid in the direction of the compressor mounting bolt and grommet that was removed. (See Fig. 40.) Cut replacement base shield along dotted lines as shown in Fig. 40 and reinstall in reverse direction. When installing the base shield, place the soft side facing upward. Reinstall compressor mounting grommet and bolt. Cut Compressor Base Sound Shield along dotted lines COMPRESSOR BASE SHIELD Remove this compressor mounting bolt and grommet at this location. Slide Compressor Base Sound Shield in this direction. Fig. 40 -- Base Sound Shield C08664 Control Circuit, 24--V Each control circuit is protected against overcurrent by a 3.2 amp circuit breaker. Breaker can be reset. If it trips, determine cause of trouble before resetting. Replacement Parts A complete list of replacement parts may be obtained from any Carrier distributor upon request. Diagnostic LEDs The MBB, ECB, AUX1, IGC and DSC control boards have LED lights for diagnostic purposes. The meanings and error codes can be found in the the troubleshooting section of this manual. 69 48/50PD ITEM RUN STATUS VIEW HVAC OCC SAT ALRM TIME VERS MBB ECB AUX MARQ MODE SYS HVAC HV.DN EFF.C EFF.H OCC T.OVR LINK D.LMT C.LOC H.LOC OK.EC COOL DMD.C SA.CP SASP SR.CD SR.RH F.SPD CMP.A TG.A CAPC MAX.C MIN.C LMT.C SST.A SSP.A SCT.A SCP.A OFC.1 HEAT DMD.H AVL.H REQ.H MAX.H LMT.H F.SPD HT.1 TG.H1 HT.2 TG.H2 ECON EC.CP EC.AP EC.MP IAQ.S IAQ OAT RAT ENTH OAQ PE.1 PE.2 HRS A1 CCH IDF OFC.1 HT.1 HT.2 PE.1 PE.2 ALRM APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES Table 27 MODE - RUN STATUS EXPANSION Auto View of Run Status HVAC Mode Status Currently Occupied Supply Air Temperature Current Alarms & Alerts Time of Day Software Version Numbers CESR131459--- xx--- xx CESR131249--- xx--- xx CESR131333--- xx--- xx CESR131171--- xx--- xx Control Modes Unit operation disabled Unit operation enabled Service test enabled HVAC Operation Disabled Ventilation (fan--- only) Cooling Unoccupied Free Cooling Heating Remote HVAC Mode Disable Cool Setpoint in Effect Heat Setpoint in Effect Currently Occupied Timed Override in Effect Linkage Active Demand Limit In Effect Compressor OAT Lockout Heat OAT Lockout OK to Use Economizer? Cooling Status Cooling Demand Supply Air Control Point Cool Supply Air Setpoint Cool Demand SASP Reset Dehumidifying SASP Reset Commanded Fan Speed Compressor A Feedback Compressor A Timeguard Compressor Capacity Max Compressor Capacity Min Compressor Capacity Max Capacity In Effect Sat. Suction Temp A Suction Pressure A Sat. Condenser Temp A Condenser Pressure A Outdoor Fan 1 Relay Heating Status Heating Demand Available Heating Stages Requested Heating Stages Max Allowed Heat Stages Max Heat Stage In Effect Commanded Fan Speed Heat Stage 1 Relay Heat Stage 1 Timeguard Heat Stage 2 Relay Heat Stage 2 Timeguard Economizer Status Econo Commanded Position Econo Actual Position Min Position in Effect IAQ Level (switch) IAQ Level (sensor) Outdoor Air Temperature Return Air Temperature Outdoor Enthalpy Switch OAQ Level (sensor) Power Exhaust 1 Relay Power Exhaust 2 Relay Component Run Hours Compressor A1 Run Hours Crankcase Htr Run Hours Indoor Fan Run Hours Outdoor Fan 1 Run Hours Heat Stage 1 Run Hours Heat Stage 2 Run Hours Power Exhaust1 Run Hours Power Exhaust2 Run Hours Alarm Relay Run Hours RANGE 1=Disabled 2=Fan Only 3=Cool 4=Heat Yes/No xxx..x xx xx.xx (xx--- xx in table) UNITS CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE STATUS DISPLAY (VIEW = Display only) dF hh.mm VERSIONS 1 of 3 texts will be displayed MODEDISP 1 of 5 texts will be displayed Yes/No xxx.x xxx.x Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx On/Off xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x On/Off xxx.x x x x x xxx On/Off xxx On/Off xxx xxx xxx xxx High/Low xxxx xxx.x xxx.x High/Low xxxx On/Off On/Off xxxxx.xx xxxxx.xx xxxxx.xx xxxxx.xx xxxxx.xx xxxxx.xx xxxxx.xx xxxxx.xx xxxxx.xx COOLDISP ^F dF dF ^F ^F % sec % % % % dF psig dF psig HEATDISP ^F % sec sec % % % ppm dF dF ppm hours hours hours hours hours hours hours hours hours ECONDISP STRTHOUR CCN POINT HVACMODE OCCUPIED SAT_DISP ALRMALRT TIMECOPY MODEL_NUMBER_01 MODEL_NUMBER_02 MODEL_NUMBER_03 MODEL_NUMBER_04 SYS_MODE_TEXT1 SYS_MODE_TEXT2 (table only) SYS_MODE_TEXT3 (table only) HVACMODE_TEXT_1 HVACMODE_TEXT_2 (table only) HVACMODE_TEXT_3 (table only) HVACDOWN CSP_EFF HSP_EFF OCCUPIED MODETOVR MODELINK MODEDMDL COMPLOCK HEATLOCK ECONCOOL COOL_DMD SA_CTLPT SASP CD_RESET RH_RESET FANSPEED COMP_A TIMGD_A CAPACITY MAX_CAPC MIN_CAPC CAPLIMIT SST_A SSP_A SCT_A SCP_A OFC_1 HEAT_DMD AVLHSTGS REQHSTGS MAXHSTGS HSTGLIMT FANSPEED HEAT_1 TIMGD_H1 HEAT_2 TIMGD_H2 ECONOCMD ECONOPOS MIN_POS IAQIN IAQ OA_TEMP RETURN_T ENTHALPY OAQ PE_1 PE_2 HR_A1 HR_CCH HR_IDF HR_OFC_1 HR_HTR_1 HR_HTR_2 HR_PE_1 HR_PE_2 HR_ALM CCN WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible 70 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) ITEM STRT A1 CCH IDF OFC.1 HT.1 HT.2 PE.1 PE.2 ALRM (ALRMDISP) = CCN only) (GENERIC = CCN only) (LON_DATA = CCN only) Table 27 -- MODE - RUN STATUS (cont) EXPANSION Component Starts Compressor A1 Starts Crankcase Heater Starts Indoor Fan Starts Outdoor Fan 1 Starts Heat Stage 1 Starts Heat Stage 2 Starts Power Exhaust 1 Starts Power Exhaust 2 Starts Alarm Relay Starts Active Alarm 1 Code Active Alarm 2 Code Active Alarm 3 Code Active Alarm 4 Code Active Alarm 5 Code Reset All Current Alarms Reset Alarm History RANGE xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx Yes/No Yes/No UNITS CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE ALRMDISP GENERIC nviSpaceTemp nviSetPoint nvoSpaceTemp nvoUnitStatus.mode nvoUnitStatus.heat_out_p nvoUnitStatus.heat_out_s nvoUnitStatus.cool_out nvoUnitStatus.econ_out nvoUnitStatus.fan_out nvoUnitStatus.in_alarm nviSetPtOffset nviOutsideTemp nviOutsideRH nvoEffectSetPt nvoOutsideTemp nvoOutsideRH nviSpaceRH nviCO2 nvoCO2 nvoTEMP1 nvoTEMP2 nviPCT1 nvoPCT1 nviDISCRETE1 nviDISCRETE2 nviDISCRETE3 nvoDISCRETE1 nvoDISCRETE2 nvoDISCRETE3 nciCO2Limit nciSetPnts.occupied_cool nciSetPnts.standby_cool nciSetPnts.unoccupd_cool nciSetPnts.occupied_heat nciSetPnts.standby_heat nciSetPnts.unoccupd_heat xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxxx xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx xxx xxx.x xxx.x xxxx.x xxx.x xxxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxxxx xxxxx xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x Off/On No/Yes Off/On Off/On No/Yes Off/On xxxxx xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x LON_DATA dF dF dF % % % % % ^F dF % dF dF % % dF dF % % dF dF dF dF dF dF CCN POINT ST_A1 ST_CCH ST_IDF ST_OFC_1 ST_HTR_1 ST_HTR_2 ST_PE_1 ST_PE_2 ST_ALM ALMCODE1 ALMCODE2 ALMCODE3 ALMCODE4 ALMCODE5 ALRESET ALHISCLR up to 20 points NVI_SPT NVI_SP NVO_SPT NVO_MODE NVO_HPRI NVO_HSEC NVO_COOL NVO_ECON NVO_FAN NVO_ALRM NVI_SPTO NVI_OAT NVI_OARH NVO_EFSP NVO_OAT NVO_OARH NVI_SPRH NVI_CO2 NVO_CO2 NVO_SAT NVO_RAT NVI_RHSP NVO_SPRH NVI_FSD NVI_OCC NVI_IAQD NVO_FSD NVO_OCC NVO_IAQD NCI_CO2 NCI_OCSP NCI_SCSP NCI_UCSP NCI_OHSP NCI_SHSP NCI_UHSP CCN WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible 71 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) ITEM SERVICE TEST TEST INDP ECON E.CAL PE.1 PE.2 ALRM CCH FANS IDF F.SPD OFC.1 COOL CTLR CAPC F.SPD HEAT HT.1 HT.2 EXPANSION Field Service Test Mode Test Independent Outputs Economizer Position Test Calibrate Economizer Power Exhaust 1 Test Power Exhaust 2 Test Alarm Relay Test Crankcase Heat Test Test Fans Supply VFD Power Test Indoor Fan Speed Test Outdoor Fan Relay Test Test Cooling Dig Scroll Ctrl Pwr Test Compressor Capacity Test Cool Test Fan Speed Test Heating Heat Stage 1 Test Heat Stage 2 Test Table 28 MODE - SERVICE TEST RANGE On/Off 0 to 100 On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off 0 to 100 On/Off On/Off 0 to 100 0 to 100 On/Off On/Off UNITS % % % % DEFAULT Off 0 Off Off Off Off Off Off 0 Off Off 0 0 Off Off CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE MAINTENANCE DISPLAY (TEST = display only) TESTINDP TESTFANS TESTCOOL TESTHEAT CCN POINT CCN WRITE STATUS DISPLAY WRITE STATUS MAN_CTRL forcible forcible S_ECONO S_ECOCAL S_PE_1 S_PE_2 S_ALMOUT S_CCH forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible S_IDF S_VSPEED S_OFC_1 forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible S_CMPCTL S_VCAP S_VSPDCL forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible S_HEAT_1 S_HEAT_2 forcible forcible forcible forcible ITEM TEMPERATURES AIR.T SAT OAT SPT SPTO RAT REF.T SST.A SCT.A EXPANSION Air Temperatures Supply Air Temperature Outdoor Air Temperature Space Temperature Space Temperature Offset Return Air Temperature Refrigerant Temperatures Sat. Suction Temp A Sat. Condenser Temp A Table 29 MODE - TEMPERATURES RANGE UNITS CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE STATUS DISPLAY UINPUT xxx.x dF xxx.x dF xxx.x dF xxx.x dF xxx.x dF xxx.x dF xxx.x dF xxx.x dF CCN POINT CCN WRITE STATUS DISPLAY WRITE STATUS SAT_DISP OA_TEMP SPACE_T SPTO RETURN_T SST_A SCT_A forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible ITEM PRESSURES SSP.A SCP.A EXPANSION Suction Pressure A Condenser Pressure A Table 30 MODE - PRESSURES RANGE xxx.x xxx.x UNITS psig psig CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE STATUS DISPLAY UINPUT CCN POINT CCN WRITE STATUS SSP_A SCP_A 72 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) ITEM SETPOINTS OCSP UCSP OHSP UHSP GAP STO.R SASP RH.SP RH.DB C.LO HT.LO EH.LO EL.LO FC.LO EXPANSION Occupied Cool Setpoint Unoccupied Cool Setpoint Occupied Heat Setpoint Unoccupied Heat Setpoint Heat--- Cool Setpoint Gap SPT Offset Range (+/--- ) Cool Supply Air Setpoint Space RH Setpoint Space RH Deadband Compressor Lockout Temp Heating Lockout Temp Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit Free Cool Low Temp Limit Table 31 MODE - SET POINTS RANGE UNITS DEFAULT 55 to 80F dF 78 75 to 95F dF 85 55 to 80F dF 68 40 to 80F dF 60 2 to 10F ^F 5 0 to 5F ^F 5 45 to 75 dF 65 30 to 95 % 50 2 to 20 % 5 0 to 100F dF 0 40 to 125F dF 75 40 to 100F dF 65 --- 30 to 50F dF 0 0 to 70F dF 50 CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE SETPOINT CONFIGURATION SET_PNT CCN POINT OCSP UCSP OHSP UHSP HCSP_GAP SPTO_RNG SASP SPRH_SP SPRH_DB OATLCOMP OATLHEAT OATLECLH OATLECLL OATLUEFC ITEM EXPANSION INPUTS GEN.I FIL.S FAN.S FDWN ENTH RM.OC HUM CMP.A C.ALM CS.IN CS.A1 AIR.Q IAQ.S IAQ OAQ SP.RH General Inputs Filter Status Switch Fan Status Switch Fire Shutdown Switch Outdoor Enthalpy Switch Remote Occupancy Switch Space Humidity Switch Compressor A Feedback Scroll Compressor Alarm Current Sensor Inputs Compressor A1 Feedback Air Quality Inputs IAQ Level (switch) IAQ Level (sensor) OAQ Level (sensor) Space Humidity Sensor Table 32 MODE -- INPUTS RANGE UNITS Dirty/Clean On/Off On/Off High/Low On/Off High/Low On/Off On/Off On/Off High/Low xxxx xxxx xxx.x ppm ppm % CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE STATUS DISPLAY UINPUT CCN POINT CCN WRITE STATUS DISPLAY WRITE STATUS FILTSTAT FAN_STAT FIREDOWN ENTHALPY REM_OCC HUM_STAT COMP_A COMP_ALM forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible CS_A1 IAQIN IAQ OAQ SPRH forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible ITEM OUTPUTS FANS IDF F.SPD OFC.1 COOL CTLR CAPC CCH HEAT HT.1 HT.2 ECON EC.CP EC.AP PE.1 PE.2 ALRM EXPANSION Fan Outputs Indoor Fan VFD Pwr Relay Commanded Fan Speed Outdoor Fan 1 Relay Cool Outputs Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr Compressor Capacity Crankcase Heat Relay Heat Outputs Heat Stage 1 Relay Heat Stage 2 Relay Economizer Outputs Econo Commanded Position Econo Actual Position Power Exhaust 1 Relay Power Exhaust 2 Relay Alarm Relay Table 33 MODE - OUTPUTS RANGE UNITS CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE STATUS DISPLAY UOUTPUT On/Off xxx % On/Off On/Off xxx % On/Off On/Off On/Off 0 to 100 % 0 to 100 % On/Off On/Off On/Off CCN POINT IDF FANSPEED OFC_1 COMPCTLR CAPACITY CCH HEAT_1 HEAT_2 ECONOCMD ECONOPOS PE_1 PE_2 ALMOUT CCN WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible forcible DISPLAY WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible forcible 73 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) ITEM CONFIGURATION DISP METR LANG PROT PSWD TEST UNIT S.DLY OC.FN IDF.F FS.MX FS.MN FS.VM FN.SW FL.SW FS.SW RM.SW RH.S RH.SW TCS.C TCS.H COOL MIN.C FS.CD MRT.C MOT.C RST.C FOD.C CS.A1 C.LO ALM.N SAT SASP SA.MU SA.MD SST SST.O SST.1 SST.2 SST.3 PSI.D OFC 1.MXP 2.MNP 2.ON 2.OFF Table 34 MODE - CONFIGURATION EXPANSION RANGE Display Configuration Metric Display Language Selection Password Enable Service Password Test Display LEDs Unit Configuration Startup Delay Fan On When Occupied Shut Down on IDF Failure Supply Fan Maximum Speed Supply Fan Minimum Speed Vent Mode Fan Speed Fan Status Switch Filter Status Switch Fire Shutdown Switch Remote Occupancy Switch RH Sensor on OAQ Input Space Humidity Switch Temp Cmp Strt Cool Factr Temp Cmp Strt Heat Factr Cooling Configuration Min Compressor Capacity Fan Speed Control Demand Compressor Min On Time Compressor Min Off Time Runtime to Reset Strikes Fan-off Delay, Mech Cool Current Sensing A1 On/Off 0=English 1=Spanish 2=French 3=Portuguese Enable/Disable 0000 to 9999 On/Off 0 to 600 Yes/No Yes/No 80 to 100 10 to 70 10 to 100 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed Yes/No 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed 0 to 60 0 to 60 15 to 80 1 to 9.9 120 to 999 300 to 999 120 to 999 0 to 600 Enable/Disable Compressor Lockout Temp Alert Each Strike Supply Air Temperature Cool Supply Air Setpoint SASP Maximum Reset Up SASP Maximum Reset Down Low Suction Control Suction OK Temperature Low Suction --- Level 1 Low Suction --- Level 2 Low Suction --- Level 3 Ckt A Minimum Pressure Outdoor Fan Control Fan Lev1 Max Pressure Fan Lev2 Min Pressure Fan Lev2 On Temperature Fan Lev2 Off Temperature 0 to 100F Yes//No 45 to 75 0 to 20 --- 20 to 0 10 to 50 10 to 50 5 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 500 100 to 500 100 to 500 0 to 100 0 to 100 UNITS DEFAULT Off 0 CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE SERVICE CONFIGURATION DISPLAY CCN POINT DISPUNIT LANGUAGE Disable 1111 Off sec 30 Yes Yes % 100 % 70 % 50 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP 0 (display only, not in table) UNIT PASS_EBL PASSWORD DISPTEST STARTDLY OCC_FAN FATALFAN SPEEDMAX SPEEDMIN SPEEDVNT FANSTCFG FILSTCFG SHTDNCFG REMOCCFG No RH_OAQ 0 HUMSTCFG mins mins % ^F sec sec sec sec dF dF ^F ^F 0 0 70 3 180 300 300 60 Disable: reserved for future use DO NOT ENABLE 0 Yes 65 10 --- 10 COOL_CFG TCSTCOOL TCSTHEAT MIN_CAPC SPEEDDMD MIN_ON MIN_OFF MIN_ON_S COOL_FOD A1_SENSE OATLCOMP ALM_NOW SASP SASPMAXU SASPMAXD dF 18 dF 20 dF 15 dF 10 psig 20 psig 450 psig 200 F 55 F 45 SSTOK SSTLEV1 SSTLEV2 SSTLEV3 DELTAP_A LEV1MAXP LEV2MINP LEV2ON LEV2OFF PAGE NO. 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 17 16 25 26 25 16 16 16 27 27 27 27 27 18 18 18 18 74 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) ITEM HEAT HT.TY N.HTR MRT.H MOT.H H.DEC H.INC FOD.E FOD.G HT.LO SAT SAT.H SAM.L SAM.U SPT HT.PD HT.ND H.LAG ECON EC.EN E.CTL MP.25 MP.50 MP.75 MP.MX EC.MX M.ANG EH.LO EL.LO DF.DB UEFC FC.TM FC.LO PE.EN PE1.C PE2.C IDF.C EN.SW Table 34 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont) EXPANSION Heating Configuration Type of Heat Installed RANGE 0=No Heat 1=Gas 2=Electric Number of Heat Stages 1 to 2 Heat Minimum On Time Heat Minimum Off Time Heat Stage Decrease Time Heat Stage Increase Time Fan--- off Delay, Elect Heat Fan--- off Delay, Gas Heat Heating Lockout Temp SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SAT Heat Mode Sensing Maximum SAT Lower Level Maximum SAT Upper Level SPACE TEMPERATURE SPT Heat Demand (+) Level SPT Heat Demand (--- ) Level Heat Thermal Lag Factor Economizer Configuration Economizer Installed Economizer Control Type Econ Min at 25% Fanspeed Econ Min at 50% Fanspeed Econ Min at 75% Fanspeed Econ Min at Max Fanspeed Econo Cool Max Position Min Actuator Ctrl Angle Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit Diff Dry Bulb Control Unoccupied Free Cooling Free Cool PreOcc Time Free Cool Low Temp Limit Power Exhaust Installed Power Exhaust Stage1 CFM Power Exhaust Stage2 CFM Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM Enthalpy Switch 60 to 999 60 to 999 120 to 999 120 to 999 10 to 600 45 to 600 40 to 125F Enable/Disable 85 to 200 85 to 200 0.5 to 5 --- 5 to --- 0.5 0 to 5 Yes/No 1=Dig/Position 2=Dig/Command 3=Analog Ctrl 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 75 to 90 40 to 100F --- 30 to 50F Disable/Enable 0=Disabled 1=Unoccupied 2=Preoccupancy 1 to 9999 --- 30 to 70F Yes/No 100 to 15000 100 to 15000 500 to 15000 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed UNITS sec sec sec DEFAULT 0 (50 series with no electric heat) 1 (48 series) 2 (50 series with electric heat) 1 (50 series <15kW) 2 (48 series, 50 series >=15kW) 120 120 300 CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE HEAT_CFG CCN POINT HEATTYPE NUM_HEAT HMIN_ON HMIN_OFF HSTAGDEC sec 450 sec 30 sec 45 dF 75 HSTAGINC ELEC_FOD GAS_FOD OATLHEAT Disable dF 140 dF 160 SAT_HEAT SATMAX_L SATMAX_H ^F 1 ^F --- 1 min 1 No: no FIOP Yes: FIOP 1 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 30 % 100 88 dF 65 dF 0 Enable 2 min 120 dF 50 No: no FIOP Yes: FIOP cfm 600 cfm 0 cfm 1600 (05) 2000 (06) 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP ECON_CFG HDEM_POS HDEM_NEG HEAT_LAG ECONO ECON_CTL MINP_25 MINP_50 MINP_75 MINP_MAX ECONOMAX MINANGLE OATLECLH OATLECLL DIFFBULB UEFC_CFG UEFCTIME OATLUEFC PE_ENABL PE1_CFM PE2_CFM IDF_CFM ENTHLCFG PAGE NO. 18 19 19 19 19 19 15 15 18 18 19 19 19 20 21 21 21 21 21 20 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 61 75 48/50PD ITEM AIR.Q IA.CF IA.FN II.CF II.FN AQ.MN OVR.P OA.CF OAQ.L AQD.L AQD.H DF.ON DF.OF I.4M I.20M O.4M O.20M H.4M H.20M ALM.O A.SPC A.SRT A.OAT A.CS A.CMP A.CKT A.SSP A.SCT A.FAN A.FIL A.ECO PID EC.P EC.I EC.D EC.DT E.DBD CP.P CP.I CP.D CP.DT LK.P LK.I LK.D LK.DT APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) Table 34 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont) EXPANSION Air Quality Config. IAQ Analog Input Config IAQ Analog Fan Config IAQ Switch Input Config IAQ Switch Fan Config Econo Min IAQ Position IAQ Override Position OAQ Analog Input Config OAQ Lockout Limit AQ Differential Low AQ Differential High Fan On AQ Differential Fan Off AQ Differential IAQ Sensor Value at 4mA IAQ Sensor Value at 20mA OAQ Sensor Value at 4mA OAQ Sensor Value at 20mA RH Sensor Value at 4mA RH Sensor Value at 20mA Alarm Relay Config. SPT/SPRH Sensor Failure SAT/RAT Sensor Failure OAT Thermistor Failure Current Sensor Failure Compressor Failure Refrig Circuit Failure SSP Transducer Failure SCT Thermistor Failure Indoor Fan Failure Dirty Filter Economizer Failure PID Configurations Economizer PID --- kP Economizer PID --- kI Economizer PID --- kD Economizer PID --- rate Economizer PID Deadband Capacity PID --- kP Capacity PID --- kI Capacity PID --- kD Capacity PID --- rate Linkage Staging PID --- kP Linkage Staging PID --- kI Linkage Staging PID --- kD Linkage Staging PID --rate RANGE 0=No IAQ 1=DCV 2=Override IAQ 3=Ctrl Min Pos 0=Never 1=Occupied 2=Always 0=No IAQ 1=DCV N/O 2=DCV N/C 3=Override N/O 4=Override N/C 0=Never 1=Occupied 2=Always 0 to 100 0 to 100 0=No OAQ 1=DCV 2=Lockout OAQ 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 50 60 to 100 Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 0.0 to 99.9 0.0 to 99.9 0.0 to 99.9 10.0 to 180.0 0 to 25 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 1 to 30 0.0 to 99.9 0.0 to 99.9 0.0 to 99.9 10.0 to 180.0 UNITS DEFAULT 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP 0 0 0 % 10 % 100 0 % % sec % secs secs 600 100 700 600 200 0 2000 0 2000 0 100 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2.5 0.1 1 15 3 1.5 0.1 1 5 10 5 5 30 CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE IAQ_CFG CCN POINT IAQANCFG IAQANFAN IAQINCFG ALM_CFG PID_CFG IAQINFAN IAQMINP IAQOVPOS OAQANCFG OAQLOCK DAQ_LOW DAQ_HIGH DAQFNON DAQFNOFF IAQ_4MA IAQ_20MA OAQ_4MA OAQ_20MA RH_4MA RH_20MA SPACE_AL SATRATAL OAT_AL CS_AL COMP_AL CKT_AL SSP_AL SCT_AL FAN_AL FILT_AL ECON_AL ECONO_P ECONO_I ECONO_D ECONO_DT ECONBAND VCAP_P VCAP_I VCAP_D VCAP_DT LINK_P LINK_I LINK_D LINK_DT PAGE NO. 21 22 23 23 22 22 23 23 22 22 23 23 22 22 23 23 17 17 25 76 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) ITEM (GENERIC = CCN only) TRIM SPT.C SPT.T SAT.C SAT.T RAT.C RAT.T CCN CCN.A CCN.B BAUD BROD B.TIM B.OAT B.GS B.ACK SCH.O SCH.N HOL.G OV.TL OV.EX OV.SP LDSH S.GRP R.MXC S.MXC R.MXH S.MXH Table 34 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont) EXPANSION POINT 01 Definition RANGE 8--- char ASCII UNITS DEFAULT CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE GENERICS CCN POINT Point_01 POINT 02 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_02 POINT 03 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_03 POINT 04 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_04 POINT 05 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_05 POINT 06 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_06 POINT 07 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_07 POINT 08 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_08 POINT 09 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_09 POINT 10 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_10 POINT 11 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_11 POINT 12 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_12 POINT 13 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_13 POINT 14 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_14 POINT 15 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_15 POINT 16 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_16 POINT 17 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_17 POINT 18 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_18 POINT 19 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_19 POINT 20 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_20 Sensor Calibration Space Temp Calibration Space Temp Trim Supply Air Temp Calib. Supply Air Temp Trim Return Air Temp Calib. Return Air Temp Trim --- 30 to 130 --- 30 to 30 --- 30 to 130 --- 30 to 30 --- 30 to 130 --- 30 to 30 dF ^F 0 dF ^F 0 dF ^F 0 CCN Configuration CCN Element Number 1 to 239 1 CCN Bus Number 0 to 239 0 CCN Baud Rate 2400, 4800, 9600, 3 19200, 38400 CCN Broadcast Config. CCN Time/Date Broadcast Yes/No No CCN OAT Broadcast Yes/No No Global Schedule Broadcast Yes/No No CCN Broadcast Ack'er Yes/No No CCN Schedule Overrides Schedule Number 0 = Always 0 Occupied 1--- 64 = Local Schedule 65--- 99 = Global Schedule Accept Global Holidays Yes/No No Override Time Limit 0 to 4 hours 4 Timed Override Hours 0 to 4 hours 0 SPT Override Enabled Yes/No Yes CCN Schedule Overrides Loadshed Group Number 0 to 16 0 Redline Max Capacity 0 to 100 % 100 Loadshed Max Capacity 0 to 100 % 100 Redline Max Heat Stages 0 to 2 2 Loadshed Max Heat 0 to 2 2 Stages (CCN TRIM --- see Maintenance Display) CONFIGURATION 48_50_PD BRODEFS SCHEDOVR CCNADD CCNBUS CCNBAUDD CCNBC OATBC GSBC CCNBCACK SCHEDNUM LOADSHED HOLIDAYT OTL OVR_EXT TIMEOVER SHED_NUM MAXCREDL MAXCSHED MAXHREDL MAXHSHED PAGE NO. 5 40 40 40 40 40 40 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 77 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) ITEM TIME CLOCK TIME TIME DATE MNTH DOM YEAR DAY DST STR.M STR.W STR.D M.ADD STP.M STP.W STP.D M.SUB SCH.L PER.x OCC.x UNC.x MON.x TUE.x WED.x THU.x FRI.x SAT.x SUN.x HOL.x (repeat up to x=8 Periods) (OCCFECS = CCN only) HOL.L HOL.x MON.x DAY.x LEN.x (repeat up to x=9 Holidays) EXPANSION Table 35 MODE - TIME CLOCK RANGE UNITS DEFAULT Time of Day Hour and Minute Current Date Month of Year Day of Month Year Day of Week Daylight Savings Config. xx.xx January, February, &, December 1 to 31 xxxx Monday, Tuesday, &, Sunday hh.mm CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE CONFIGURATION TIME BRODEFS (continued) CCN POINT TIME MOY DOM YOCDISP DOWDISP Start Month January, February, &, 3 December Start Week 1 to 5 2 Start Day 1 to 7 7 Minutes to Add 0 to 90 60 STARTM STARTW STARTD MINADD Stop Month Stop Week Stop Day Minutes to Subtract Occupancy Schedule Occupancy Period x Occupied From Occupied To Monday in Period Tuesday in Period Wednesday in Period Thursday in Period Friday in Period Saturday in Period Sunday in Period Holiday in Period January, February, &, December 1 to 5 1 to 7 0 to 90 00.00 to 23.59 00.00 to 23.60 Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 11 1 7 60 hh.mm hh.mm 00.00 00.00 No No No No No No No No (SCH.L = Display only) STOPM STOPW STOPD MINSUB PERxOCC PERxUNC PERxMON PERxTUE PERxWED PERxTHU PERxFRI PERxSAT PERxSUN PERxHOL Timed Override Hours Period x DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied From Occupied To x xxxxxxxx 00.00 to 24.00 00.00 to 24.00 Holiday Schedule Holiday x Holiday Start Month Holiday Start Day Holiday Duration (days) 1 to 12 = January to December 1 to 31 1 to 99 hours hh.mm hh.mm 00000000 00.00 00.00 OCCDEFCS HOLIDAY 0 HOLDYxxS 0 0 0 OVR--- EXT DOWx OCCTODx UNOCTODx (repeat up to x=8 Periods) HOLMONxx HOLDAYxx HOLLENxx (repeat up to xx=30 Holidays) ITEM (ALARMDEF = CCN only) (CTLRID = CCN only) EXPANSION Alarm Routing Control Equipment Priority Comm Failure Retry Time Re--- Alarm Time Alarm System Name Device Name: Description: Location: Software Part Number: Model Number: Serial Number: Reference Number: Table 36 CCN ONLY TABLES RANGE UNITS DEFAULT 00000000 to 11111111 0 to 7 1 to 240 1 to 255 up to 8 alphanum 48_50_PD text string text string CESR131459--- XX--- XX 11000000 4 min 10 min 180 48_50_PD CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE ALARMDEF CTLR--- ID CCN POINT ALRM_CNT EQP_TYPE RETRY_TM RE--- ALARM ALRM_NAM 78 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) ITEM OPERATING MODES MODE SYS HVAC HV.DN EFF.C EFF.H OCC T.OVR LINK D.LMT C.LOC H.LOC OK.EC COOL COOL OK.CL MS.TG OK.EC OK.MC C.LOC C.LO IDF F.SPD REQ.C MIN.C MAX.C LMT.C CAPC CTLR CMP.A ST.A F.LEV SAT SAT SA.DM SPT SPT TRND DMD.C Table 37 MODE - OPERATING MODES EXPANSION Control Modes Unit operation disabled Unit operation enabled Service test enabled HVAC Operation Disabled Ventilation (fan--- only) Cooling Unoccupied Free Cooling Heating Remote HVAC Mode Disable Cool Setpoint in Effect Heat Setpoint in Effect Currently Occupied Timed Override in Effect Linkage Active Demand Limit In Effect Compressor OAT Lockout Heat OAT Lockout Ok to Use Economizer? Cool Mode Diagnostic In Cooling Mode? OK to Select Cool Mode? Mode Select Timeguard OK to Use Economizer? OK to Use Compressor? Compressor OAT Lockout Compressor Lockout Temp Indoor Fan State Commanded Fan Speed Requested Cooling Capacity Min Compressor Capacity Max Compressor Capacity Max Capacity In Effect Compressor Capacity Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr Compressor A Feedback Circuit A Strikes Outdoor Fan Level Supply Air Temperature Supply Air Temperature Supply Air Temp Demand Space Temperature Space Temperature Spacetemp Trend (F/min) Cooling Demand RANGE 1 of 3 texts will be displayed 1 of 5 texts will be displayed Yes/No xxx.x xxx.x Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No xxx Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No xxx On/Off xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx On/Off On/Off x x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x UNITS secs dF % % % % % CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE MAINTENANCE DISPLAY MODES CCN POINT SYS_MODE_TEXT1 SYS_MODE_TEXT2 (table only) SYS_MODE_TEXT3 (table only) HVACMODE_TEXT _1 HVACMODE_TEXT _2 (table only) HVACMODE_TEXT _3 (table only) HVACDOWN COOLDIAG CSP_EFF HSP_EFF OCCUPIED MODETOVR MODELINK MODEDMDL COMPLOCK HEATLOCK ECONCOOL IN_COOL OKTOCOOL COOLMSTG ECONCOOL MECHCOOL COMPLOCK OATLCOMP IDFSTATE FANSPEED REQ_CAPC MIN_CAPC MAX_CAPC CAPLIMIT CAPACITY COMPCTLR COMP_A ASTRIKES FANLEV dF SAT_DISP ^F SAT_DMD dF SPACE_T SPTTREND ^F COOL_DMD CCN WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible DISPLAY WRITE STATUS forcible 79 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) Table 37 -- MODE - OPERATING MODES (cont) ITEM HEAT HEAT OK.HT MS.TG H.LOC HT.LO IDF F.SPD AVL.H REQ.H LMT.H ACT.H HT.1 HT.2 SAT SAT.H SAT SAM.L SAM.U SPT SPT DMD.H TRND HT.PD HT.ND H.LAG ECON EC.EN OK.EC OCC IDF F.SPD COOL OAT RAT E.LOC D.LOC EH.LO EL.LO FC.LO EN.LO EC.MX MP.MX AQ.DV AQ.MN AQ.OV OVR.P AQ.LO OAQ.L LP.OV EC.CP EC.AP EC.MP C.ANG E.CAL DMD.L D.LMT LMT.C LMT.H REDL SHED MAX.C MAX.H (Display TRIM --- see Configuration) EXPANSION Heat Mode Diagnostic In Heating Mode? OK to Select Heat Mode? Mode Select Timeguard Heat OAT Lockout Heating Lockout Temp Indoor Fan State Commanded Fan Speed Available Heating Stages Requested Heating Stages Max Heat Stage In Effect Actual Heating Stages Heat Stage 1 Relay Heat Stage 2 Relay Supply Air Temperature SAT Heat Mode Sensing Supply Air Temperature Maximum SAT Lower Level Maximum SAT Upper Level Space Temperature Space Temperature Heating Demand Spacetemp Trend (F/min) SPT Heat Demand (+) Level SPT Heat Demand (--- ) Level Heat Thermal Lag Factor Economizer Diagnostic Economizer Installed Ok to Use Economizer? Currently Occupied Indoor Fan State Commanded Fan Speed In Cooling Mode? Outdoor Air Temperature Return Air Temperature Econo Cool OAT Lockout Econo Diff DBulb Lockout Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit Free Cool Low Temp Limit Econo Cool Enth Lockout Econo Cool Max Position Econo Min at Max Fanspeed IAQ DCV Mode Econo Min IAQ Position IAQ Override Mode IAQ Override Position OAQ Lockout Mode OAQ Lockout Limit Lo Refrig Press Override Econo Commanded Position Econo Actual Position Min Position in Effect Actuator Control Angle Economizer Calibrating Demand Limiting Demand Limit In Effect Max Capacity In Effect Max Heat Stage In Effect Redline Activated Loadshed Activated Max Compressor Capacity Max Allowed Heat Stages Sensor Calibration Space Temp Calibration Space Temp Trim Supply Air Temp Calib. Supply Air Temp Trim Return Air Temp Calib. Return Air Temp Trim RANGE Yes/No Yes/No xxx Yes/No xxx On/Off xxx x x x x On/Off On/Off UNITS secs dF CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE HEATDIAG CCN POINT IN_HEAT OKTOHEAT HEATMSTG HEATLOCK OATLHEAT IDFSTATE FANSPEED AVLHSTGS REQHSTGS HSTGLIMT ACTHSTGS HEAT_1 HEAT_2 Enable/Disable xxx.x dF xxx dF xxx dF SAT_HEAT SAT_DISP SATMAX_L SATMAX_H xxx.x dF xxx.x dF xxx.x xx.x ^F xx.x ^F x.x min Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No On/Off NNN Yes/No xxx.x dF xxx.x dF Yes/No Yes/No xxx dF xx dF xx dF Yes/No xxx % xxx % Yes/No xxx % Yes/No xxx % Yes/No xxxx Yes/No xxx % xxx % xxx % Yes/No Yes/No xxx x Yes/No Yes/No x x --- 30 to 130 dF --- 30 to 30 ^F --- 30 to 130 dF --- 30 to 30 ^F --- 30 to 130 dF --- 30 to 30 ^F ECONDIAG DMDL TRIM SPACE_T HEAT_DMD SPTTREND HDEM_POS HDEM_NEG HEAT_LAG ECONO ECONCOOL OCCUPIED IDFSTATE FANSPEED IN_COOL OA_TEMP RETURN_T ECONLOCK DFDBLOCK OATLECLH OATLECLL OATLUEFC ENTHLOCK ECONOMAX MINP_MAX IN_IAQDV IAQMINP IN_IAQOV IAQOVPOS IN_OAQLO OAQLOCK IN_LPOV ECONOCMD ECONOPOS MIN_POS CTLANGLE ECOINCAL MODEDMDL CAPLIMIT HSTGLIMT MODEREDL MODESHED MAX_CAPC MAXHSTGS SPT_CAL SPT_OFF SAT_CAL SAT_OFF RAT_CAL RAT_OFF CCN WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible 80 DISPLAY WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible 48/50PD APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) Table 37 -- MODE - OPERATING MODES (cont) ITEM (OCCDEFM = CCN only) (LINKDATA = CCN only) EXPANSION Occupancy Supervisory Current Mode (1=Occup) Current Occup Period # Time--- Override in Effect Time--- Override Duration Current Occupied Time Current Unoccupied Time Next Occupied Day Next Occupied Time Next Unoccupied Day Next Unoccupied Time Previous Unoccupied Day Previous Unoccupied Time CCN --- Linkage Supervisory Element # Supervisory Bus Supervisory Block Number Average Occup. Heat Stp. Average Occup. Cool Stp. Average Unocc. Heat Stp. Average Unocc. Cool Stp. Average Zone Temperature Average Occup. Zone Temp Linkage System Occupied? Next Occupied Day Next Occupied Time Next Unoccupied Day Next Unoccupied Time Last Unoccupied Day Last Unoccupied Time RANGE 0,1 0 to 8 Yes/No 0 to 4 xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xx.xx xxx xxx xxx xxxx.x xxxx.x xxxx.x xxxx.x xxxx.x xxxx.x Yes/No "Mon", "Tue", & , "Sun" xx:xx "Mon", "Tue", & , "Sun" xx:xx "Mon", "Tue", & , "Sun" xx:xx UNITS hours hh:mm hh:mm hh:mm hh:mm hh.mm dF dF dF dF dF dF 3--- cha r text hh:mm 3--- cha r text hh:mm 3--- cha r text hh:mm CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE OCCDEFM LINKDATA CCN POINT MODE PER_NO OVERLAST OVR_HRS STRTTIME ENDTIME NXTOCDAY NXTOCTIM NXTUNDAY NXTUNTIM PRVUNDAY PRVUNTIM SUPE--- ADR SUPE--- BUS BLOCKNUM AOHS AOCS AUHS AUCS AZT AOZT LOCC LNEXTOCD LNEXTOCC LNEXTUOD LNEXTUNC LLASTUOD LLASTUNC CCN WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible DISPLAY WRITE STATUS ITEM EXPANSION ALARMS R.CUR R.HIS CURR alarm# (repeat up to 25 alarms) HIST alarm# (repeat up to 20 Alarms) Reset All Current Alarms Reset Alarm History Currently Active Alarms text string Alarm History alarm#--- mm/dd/yy--- hh.mm --- text string Table 38 MODE - ALARMS RANGE Yes/No Yes/No DEFAULT No No CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE MAINTENANCE DISPLAY ALARMS CCN POINT ALRESET ALHISCLR ALARM01C --ALARM25C ALARM HISTORY CCN WRITE STATUS DISPLAY WRITE STATUS forcible forcible forcible forcible 81 APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION On 48/50PD units, the supply fan speed is controlled by a 3--phase The VFD is powered during normal operation to prevent VFD. The VFD is located in the supply fan section behind an condensation from forming on the boards during the off mode and indoor fan scroll. The VFD speed is controlled directly by the ComfortLinkt controls through a 0--10Vdc signal based on a is stopped by driving the speed to 0 (by sending a 0Vdc signal to the VFD). The units use ABB VFDs. The interface wiring for the space temperature sensor. The VFD has a display, which can be VFDs is shown in the figure below. The VFD connects to used for service diagnostics, but setup of the control is to be done ComfortLink through a 0--10Vdc output on the AUX1 board. through the scrolling marquee display. Terminal designations are shown in the Terminal Designation table. Configurations are shown in the VFD Configurations table. Table 39 VFD TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS TERMINAL U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 X1--- 11 (GND) X1--- 12 (COMMON) X1--- 10 (24VDC) X1--- 13 (DI--- 1) X1--- 10 (24VDC) X1--- 16 (DI--- 4) X1--- 2 (AI--- 1) X1--- 3 (AGND) FUNCTION Three--- Phase main circuit input power supply Three--- Phase AC output to motor, 0V to maximum input voltage level Factory--- supplied jumper Run (factory--- supplied jumper) Start Enable 1 (factory--- supplied jumper). When opened, the drive goes to emergency stop Factory wired for 0--- 10Vdc remote input 48/50PD 0-10Vdc Fig. 41 -- VFD Wiring 82 A48-7712 C08674 48/50PD APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT) Parameter Group START--- UP DATA Parameter Number 9901 9902 9904 9905 9906 9907 9908 Table 40 VFD CONFIGURATIONS APPLICATION CRITICAL DRIVE PARAMETERS FOR ABB ACH550 DRIVES Description Value HK30WA001--- 208/230V HK30WA008--- 460V Language (0) English Application Macro (1) HVAC Default Motor Control Mode (3) Scalar : Freq Motor Nominal Voltage 230 460 Motor Nominal Current Motor Nominal Frequency Motor Nominal Speed 7.0 3.5 60 1725 START/STOP/DIR ANALOG INPUTS RELAY OUTPUTS SYSTEM CONTROL 9909 1001 1002 1003 1301 1302 1401 1402 1403 1601 1608 1701 Motor Nominal Power EXT1 Commands EXT2 Commands Direction Minimum Al --- 1 Maximum Al --- 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 3 Run Enable Start Enable 1 Override Set 2.4 (1) DI --- 1 Start/Stop (1) DI --- 1 Start/Stop (1) Forward 20 100 (7) Started (2) Run (3) Fault (--- 1) (0) Not Set (4) DI --- 4 (3) DI --- 3 1702 Override Freq 60 OVER RIDE 1703 Override Speed 1750 1704 Over Pass Code 0 1705 Override On LIMITS START/STOP ACCEL/DECEL 2003 2007 2008 2101 2102 2202 2203 2601 Maximum Current Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Start Function Stop Function Accelerate Time Decelerate Time Flux Optimization 8.0 4.0 0 60 (8) Ramp (2) Ramp 30 30 (1) On MOTOR 2605 Volt/Freq Ratio (2) Squared 2606 Switching Frequency 8 FAULT FUNCTIONS PANEL DISPLAY PROCESS VALUES 3006 3415 3416 3417 3418 3419 Motor Thermal Time Signal 3 Parameter Signal 3 Minimum Signal 3 Maximum Output 3 DSP Form Output 3 DSP Units 1050 (120) Al1 0 100 (5) + 0.0 (127) Vdc 3420 Output 3 Minimum 0 3421 Output 3 Maximum 10 All Other Parameter Settings are ABB Drive Default Settings UNITS ------- Volts Amps Hz RPM HP ------% % ------------- Hz RPM --- --- Amps Hz Hz --- --Seconds Seconds --- --- kHz Seconds ----------- Vdc Vdc NOTE ABB Drive default PD Product specific setting ABB Drive default PD Product specific setting PD Product specific setting ABB Drive default PD Product specific setting PD Product specific setting ABB Drive default ABB Drive default PD Product specific setting ABB Drive default ABB Drive default Carrier default settings from PPS ABB Drive default ABB Drive default ABB Drive default ABB Drive default Carrier default settings from PPS Carrier default settings from PPS Carrier default settings from PPS Carrier default settings from PPS Carrier default settings from PPS PD Product specific setting ABB Drive default ABB Drive default PD Product specific setting PD Product specific setting ABB Drive default ABB Drive default PD Product specific setting Carrier default settings from PPS Carrier default settings from PPS Carrier default settings from PPS ABB Drive Default ABB Drive Default ABB Drive Default ABB Drive Default PD Product Specific Setting PD Product Specific Setting PD Product Specific Setting 83 48/50PD APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT) VFD Operation The VFD keypad is shown in Fig. 42. The function of SOFT KEYS 1 and 2 change depending on what is displayed on the screen. The function of SOFT KEY 1 matches the word in the lower left--hand box on the display screen. The function of SOFT KEY 2 matches the word in the lower right--hand box on the display screen. If the box is empty, then the SOFT KEY does not have a function on that specific screen. The UP and DOWN keys are used to navigate through the menus. The OFF key is used to turn off the VFD. The AUTO key is used to change control of the drive to automatic control. The HAND key is used to change NOTE: The current parameter value appears above the highlight parameter. To view the default parameter value, press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously. To restore the default factory settings, select the application macro "HVAC Default." VFD Modes The VFD has several different modes for configuring, operating, and diagnosing the VFD. The modes are: S Standard Display mode shows drive status information and operates the drive S Parameters mode edits parameter values individually control of the drive to local (hand held) control. The HELP button is used to access the help screens. For the VFD to operate on the 48/50PD units, the drive must be set in AUTO mode. The word "AUTO" will appear in the upper left hand corner of the VFD display. Press the AUTO button to set the S Start--up Assistant mode guides the start up and configuration S Changed Parameters mode shows all changed parameters S Drive Parameter Backup mode stores or uploads the drive in AUTO mode. parameters S Clock Set mode sets the time and date for the drive S I/O Settings mode checks and edits the I/O settings Standard Display Mode Use the standard display mode to read information on the drive status and operate the drive. To reach the standard display mode, press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below. (See Fig. 43.) The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive. The HAND icon indicates that the drive control is local from the control panel. The AUTO icon indicates that the drive is in remote control mode, such as the basic I/O (X1) or field bus. Fig. 42 -- VFD Keypad C08675 Start Up with Assistant Initial start--up has been performed at the factory. Use of the start up assistant will override factory VFD configurations. See below to check that all parameters listed in VFD Configurations table are correctly configured on the VFD. Start Up by Changing Parameters Individually Initial start--up is performed at the factory. To start up the VFD with by changing individual parameters, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PARAMETERS on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired parameter group and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired parameter and press EDIT (SOFT KEY 2). 5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the value of the parameter. 6. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to store the modified value. Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value. Any modifications that are not saved will not be changed. The arrow icon indicates the drive and motor rotation status. A rotating arrow (clockwise or counterclockwise) indicates that the drive is running and at set point and the shaft direction is forward or reverse. A rotating blinking arrow indicates that the drive is running but not at set point. A stationary arrow indicates that the drive is stopped. For 48/50PD units, the correct display rotation is clockwise. The upper right corner shows the frequency set point that the drive will maintain. Using parameter group 34, the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display 3 parameter values. The default display shows parameters 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ) in percent speed, 0104 (CURRENT) in amperes, and 0120 (Al1) in voltage DC. The bottom corners of the LCD display show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys. The lower middle displays the current time (if configured to show the time). The first time the drive is powered up, it is in the OFF mode. To switch to local hand--held control and control the drive using the control panel, press and hold the HAND button. Pressing the HAND button switches the drive to hand control while keeping the drive running. Press the AUTO button to switch to remote input control. To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons, to stop the drive press the OFF button. 100.0 %SP 1.9 A 10.0 Vdc 60.0Hz 7. Choose another parameter or press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the listing of parameter groups. Continue until all the parameters have been configured and then press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu. Fig. 43 -- Standard Display Example C09249 84 48/50PD APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT) To adjust the speed in HAND mode, press the UP or DOWN buttons (the reference changes immediately). The reference can be modified in the local control (HAND) mode, and can be parameterized (using Group 11 reference select) to also allow modification in the remote control mode. Parameters Mode Drive Parameter Backup Mode The drive parameter back up mode is used to export the parameters from one drive to another. The parameters can be uploaded from a VFD to the removable control panel. The control panel can then be transferred to another drive and the parameters downloaded into memory. The Parameters mode is used to change the parameters on the Depending on the motor and application, there are two options drive. To change parameters, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PARAMETERS on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired parameter group and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired parameter and press EDIT (SOFT KEY 2). 5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the value of the parameter. 6. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to store the modified value. Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value. Any modifications that are not saved will not be changed. 7. Choose another parameter or press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the listing of parameter groups. Continue until all the parameters have been configured and then press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu. NOTE: The current parameter value appears above the highlight parameter. To view the default parameter value, press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously. To restore the default factory settings, select the Carrier application macro. Start- Up Assistant Mode To use the Start--Up Assistant, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight ASSISTANTS on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight Commission Drive and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 4. The Start--Up Assistant will display the parameters that need to be configured. Select the desired values and press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) after every change. The process will continue until all the parameters are set. The assistant checks to make sure that entered values are in range. The assistant is divided into separate tasks. The user can activate the tasks one after the other or independently. The tasks are typically done in this order: Application, References 1 and 2, Start/Stop Control, Protections, Constant Speeds, PID Control, Low Noise Setup, Panel Display, Timed Functions, and Outputs. Changed Parameters Mode available. The first option is to download all parameters. This copies both application and motor parameters to the drive from the control panel. This is recommended when using the same application for drives of the same size. This can also be used to create a backup of the parameters group for the drive. The second option downloads only the application parameters to the drive. This is recommended when using the same application for drives of different sizes. Parameters 9905, 9906, 9907, 9908, 9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, and group 51 parameters and internal motor parameters are not copied. Upload All Parameters To upload and store parameters in the control panel from the VFD, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PAR BACKUP on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight UPLOAD TO PANEL and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 4. The text "Copying Parameters" will be displayed with a progress indicator. To stop the process, select ABORT (SOFT KEY 1). 5. When the upload is complete, the text "Parameter upload successful" will be displayed. 6. The display will then return to the PAR BACKUP menu. Select EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu. 7. The control panel can now be disconnected from the drive. Download All Parameters To download all parameters from the control panel to the VFD, perform the following procedure: 1. Install the control panel with the correct parameters onto the VFD. 2. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PAR BACKUP on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DOWNLOAD TO DRIVE ALL and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 5. The text "Restoring Parameters" will be displayed with a progress indicator. To stop the process, select ABORT (SOFT KEY 1). The Changed Parameters mode is used to view and edit recently changed parameters on the drive. To view the changed parameters, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 6. When the download is complete, the text "Parameter download successful" will be displayed. 7. The display will then return to the PAR BACKUP menu. Select EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu. 8. The control panel can now be disconnected from the drive. 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CHANGED PAR on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). A list of the recently changed parameters will be displayed. 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired parameter group and press EDIT (SOFT KEY 2) to change the parameter if desired. 4. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to exit the Changed Parameters mode. 85 48/50PD Download Application Parameters To download application parameters only to the control panel from the VFD, perform the following procedure: 1. Install the control panel with the correct parameters onto the VFD. 2. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PAR BACKUP on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DOWNLOAD APPLICATION and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 5. The text "Downloading Parameters (partial)" will be displayed with a progress indicator. To stop the process, select ABORT (SOFT KEY 1). 6. When the download is complete, the text "Parameter download successful" will be displayed. 7. The display will then return to the PAR BACKUP menu. Select EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu. 8. The control panel can now be disconnected from the drive. Clock Set Mode The clock set mode is used for setting the date and time for the internal clock of the VFD. In order to use the timer functions of the VFD control, the internal clock must be set. The date is used to determine weekdays and is visible in the fault logs. To set the clock, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK SET on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The clock set parameter list will be displayed. 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK VISIBILITY and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). This parameter is used to display or hide the clock on the screen. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET TIME and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the hours and minutes. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight TIME FORMAT and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 6. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET DATE and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the day, month, and year. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 7. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DATE FORMAT and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 8. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main menu. I/O Settings Mode The I/O Settings mode is used for viewing and editing the I/O settings. To configure the I/O settings, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight I/O SETTINGS on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The I/O Settings parameter list will be displayed. 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired I/O setting and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select the parameter to view. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2). 5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration. Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value. Any modifications that are not saved will not be changed. 6. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main menu. VFD Diagnostics The drive detects error situations and reports them using: S Green and red LEDs on the body of the drive (located under the keypad) S Status LED on the control panel S Control panel display S The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters 0305 to 0309) The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. The user can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to ignore the error situation, report the situation as an alarm, or report the situation as a fault. Faults (Red LED Lit) The VFD signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by: S Enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady or flashing) S Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter (0305 to 0307) S Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code S Stopping the motor (if it was on) S Sets an appropriate bit in Fault Word parameter 0305-- 0307. The fault code on the control panel display is temporary. Pressing the MENU, ENTER, UP button or DOWN buttons removes the fault message. The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active. Alarms (Green LED Flashing) For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is advisory. For these situations, the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual. In these situations, the drive: S Flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors) S Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or 0309) S Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and/or name Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds. The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists. Correcting Faults The recommended corrective action for faults is shown in the Fault Listing Table 41. The VFD can also be reset to remove the fault. If an external source for a start command is selected and is active, the VFD may start immediately after fault reset. To reset a fault indicated by a flashing red LED, turn off the power for 5 minutes. To reset a fault indicated by a red LED (not flashing), press RESET from the control panel or turn off the power for 5 minutes. Depending on the value of parameter 1604 (FAULT RESET SELECT), digital input or serial communication could also be used to reset the drive. When the fault has been corrected, the motor can be started. 86 History For reference, the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401, 0412, 0413. For the most recent fault (identified by parameter 0401), the drive stores additional data (in parameters 0402 through 0411) to aid in troubleshooting a problem. For example, a parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault. To clear the fault history (all of Group 04, Fault History parameters), follow these steps: 1. In the control panel, Parameters mode, select parameter 0401. 2. Press EDIT. 3. Press the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously. 4. Press SAVE. Correcting Alarms To correct alarms, first determine if the Alarm requires any corrective action (action is not always required). Use Table 42 to find and address the root cause of the problem. If diagnostics troubleshooting has determined that the drive is defective during the warranty period, contact ABB Automation Inc., at 1--800--435--7365, option 4, option 3. A qualified technician will review the problem with the caller and make a determination regarding how to proceed. This may involve dispatching a designated service station (DSS) representative from an authorized station, dispatching a replacement unit, or advising return for repair. VFD Maintenance If installed in an appropriate environment, the VFD requires very little maintenance. Table 43 lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by Carrier. Heat Sink The heat sink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a dusty sink is less efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature faults become more likely. In a normal environment check the heat sink annually, in a dusty environment check more often. Check the heat sink as follows (when necessary): 1. Remove power from drive. 2. Remove the cooling fan. 3. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust. If there a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning in another room. 4. Replace the cooling fan. 5. Restore power. 48/50PD 87 48/50PD APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT) Table 41 FAULT CODES FAULT CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 101--- 105 201--- 206 FAULT NAME IN PANEL DESCRIPTION AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION OVERCURRENT DC OVERVOLT DEV OVERTEMP SHORT CIRC OVERLOAD DC OVERVOLT Al1 LOSS Al2 LOSS MOT OVERTEMP PANEL LOSS ID RUN FAIL MOTOR STALL RESERVED EXT FAULT 1 EXT FAULT 2 EARTH FAULT UNDERLOAD THERM FAIL OPEX LINK OPEX PWR CURR MEAS SUPPLY PHASE RESERVED OVERSPEED RESERVED DRIVE ID CONFIG FILE SERIAL 1 ERR EFB CON FILE FORCE TRIP EFB 1 EFB 2 EFB 3 MOTOR PHASE OUTP WIRING SYSTEM ERROR SYSTEM ERROR Output current is excessive. Check for excessive motor load, insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1, default 30 seconds), or faulty motor, motor cables or connections. Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. Check for static or transient over voltages in the input power supply, insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1, default 30 seconds), or undersized brake chopper (if present). Drive heat sink is overheated. Temperature is at or above 115_C (239_F). Check for fan failure, obstructions in the air flow, dirt or dust coating on the heat sink, excessive ambient temperature, or excessive motor load. Fault current. Check for short---circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor or supply disturbances. Inverter overload condition. The drive output current exceeds the ratings. Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. Check for missing phase in the input power supply, blown fuse, or under voltage on main circuit. Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is less than AI1 FLT LIMIT (3021). Check source and connection for analog input and parameter settings for AI1 FLT LIMIT (3021) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION. Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is less than AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022). Check source and connection for analog input and parameter settings for AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION. Motor is too hot, as estimated by the drive. Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005 through 3009). Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters. Panel communication is lost and either drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel. To correct check the communication lines and connections. Check parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR, parameters in Group 10: Command Inputs and Group 11:Reference Select (if drive operation is REM). The motor ID run was not completed successfully. Check motor connections. Motor or process stall. Motor is operating in the stall region. Check for excessive load or insufficient motor power. Check parameters 3010 through 3012. Not used. Digital input defined to report first external fault is active. See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1. Digital input defined to report second external fault is active. See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2. The load on the input power system is out of balance. Check for faults in the motor or motor cable. Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length. Motor load is lower than expected. Check for disconnected load. Check parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION through 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE. Internal fault. The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted. Contact Carrier. Internal fault. A communication ---related problem has been detected between the OMIO and OINT boards. Contact Carrier. Internal fault. Low voltage condition detected on the OINT board. Contact Carrier. Internal fault. Current measurement is out of range. Contact Carrier. Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. Check for missing main phase or blown fuse. Not used. Motor speed is greater than 120% of the larger (in magnitude) of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED parameters. Check parameter settings for 2001 and 2002. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check applicability of torque control. Check brake chopper and resistor. Not used. Internal fault. Configuration block drive ID is not valid. Internal configuration file has an error. Contact Carrier. Field bus communication has timed out. Check fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME). Check communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate). Check for poor connections and/or noise on line. Error in reading the configuration file for the field bus adapter. Fault trip forced by the field bus. See the field bus reference literature. Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent. Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent. Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent. Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. Check for motor fault, motor cable fault, thermal relay fault , or internal fault. Error in power wiring suspected. Check that input power wired to drive output. Check for ground faults. Error internal to the drive. Contact Carrier and report the error number. Error internal to the drive. Contact Carrier and report the error number. 88 APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT) FAULT CODE 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 Table 41 -- FAULT CODES (cont) FAULT NAME IN PANEL DESCRIPTION AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION PAR HZRPM PAR PFA REFNG PAR PFA IOCNF PAR AI SCALE PAR AO SCALE PAR PCU 2 PAR EXT RO PAR FBUS PAR PFA MODE PAR PCU 1 OVERRIDE/PFA CONFLICT Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following: 2001 MINIMUM SPEED > 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range: ---128/+128 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range: ---128/+128 2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range: --- 128/+128 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range: --- 128/+128 Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active. Parameter values are inconsistent. The number of programmed PFA relays does not match with Interlock configuration, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active. Check consistency of RELAY OUTPUT parameters 1401 through 1403, and 1410 through 1412. Check 8117 NR OF AUX MOTORS, 8118 AUTOCHANGE INTERV, and 8120 INTERLOCKS. Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that parameter 1301 AI 1 MIN > 1302 AI 1 MAX and that parameter 1304 AI 2 MIN > 1305 AI 2 MAX. Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that parameter 1504 AO 1 MIN > 1505 AO 1 MAX and that parameter 1510 AO 2 MIN > 1511 AO 2 MAX. Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power. Check the following parameters: 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR * 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT * 1.73 / PN) < 2.6 Where: PN = 1000 * 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are kW) or PN = 746 * 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are HP, e.g., in US) Parameter values are inconsistent. Check the extension relay module for connection and 1410 through 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 through 6 have non ---zero values. Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that a parameter is set for field bus control (e.g., 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS = 10 (COMM)), but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0. Parameter values are inconsistent. The 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must = 3 (SCALAR SPEED) when 8123 PFA ENABLE activated. Parameter values for power control are inconsistent or improper motor nominal frequency or speed. Check for both of the following: 1 < (60 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED < 16 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED / (120 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / Motor poles) < 0.992 Override mode is enabled and PFA is activated at the same time. This cannot be done because PFA interlocks cannot be observed in the override mode. 48/50PD 89 48/50PD APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT) Table 42 ALARM CODES ALARM CODE 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013* 2014 2015 2016 2017* 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 ALARM NAME IN PANEL ------DIR LOCK I/O COMM Al1 LOSS Al2 LOSS PANEL LOSS --- MOT OVERTEMP UNDERLOAD MOTOR STALL AUTORESET AUTOCHANGE PFA INTERLOCK --- OFF BUTTON PID SLEEP ID RUN OVERRIDE START ENABLE 1 MISSING START ENABLE 2 MISSING EMERGENCY STOP DESCRIPTION AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION Reserved Reserved Reserved The change in direction being attempted is not allowed. Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation, or Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change (if reverse operation is safe). Field bus communication has timed out. Check fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME). Check communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate). Check for poor connections and/or noise on line. Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting. Check input source and connections. Check the parameter that sets the minimum (3021) and the parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001). Analog input 2 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting. Check input source and connections. Check parameter that sets the minimum (3022) and the parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001). Panel communication is lost and either the VFD is in local control mode (the control panel displays HAND), or the VFD is in remote control mode (AUTO) and is parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel. To correct, check the communication lines and connections, Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS, and parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE SELECT (if drive operation is REM). Reserved Motor is hot, based on either the VFD estimate or on temperature feedback. This alarm warns that a Motor Overload fault trip may be near. Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005 through 3009). Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters. Motor load is lower than expected. This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near. Check that the motor and drive ratings match (motor is NOT undersized for the drive). Check the settings on parameters 3013 to 3015. Motor is operating in the stall region. This alarm warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near. This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault reset, which may start the motor. To control automatic reset, use parameter group 31 (AUTOMATIC RESET). This alarm warns that the PFA autochange function is active. To control PFA, use parameter group 81 (PFA) and the Pump Alternation macro. This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are active, which means that the drive cannot start any motor (when Autochange is used), or a speed regulated motor (when Autochange is not used). Reserved This alarm indicates that the OFF button has been pressed. This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active, which means that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends. To control PID sleep, use parameters 4022 through 4026 or 4122 through 4126. The VFD is performing an ID run. Override mode is activated. This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing. To control Start Enable 1 function, use parameter 1608. To correct, check the digital input configuration and the communication settings. This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing. To control Start Enable 2 function, use parameter1609. To correct, check the digital input configuration and the communication settings. Emergency stop is activated. * This alarm is not indicated by a relay output, even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions, parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM). Table 43 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS MAINTENANCE Heat sink temperature check and cleaning Main cooling fan replacement HVAC Control panel battery change INTERVAL Every 6 to 12 months (depending on the dustiness of the environment) Every five years Every ten years 90 Main Fan Replacement APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT) 3 The main cooling fan of the VFD has a life span of about 60,000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load. The expected life span doubles for each 18_F drop in the fan temperature (fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures and drive loads). 4 Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heat sink temperature in spite of heat sink cleaning. If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms 2 start appearing. Replacement fans are available from Carrier. To replace the main fan for frame sizes R1 through R2, perform the following (see Main Fan Replacement figure): 1. Remove power from drive. 2. Remove drive cover. 3. For frame sizes R1 and R2, press together the retaining clips on the fan cover and lift. 4. Disconnect the fan cable. 5. Install the new fan by reversing Steps 2 to 4. 6. Restore power. Fig. 44 -- Main Fan Replacement (Frame Sizes R1--R2) 3 C08681 Control Panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window. Battery Replacement A battery is only used in assistant control panels that have the clock function available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions. The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel. Replace the battery with type CR2032. 48/50PD 91 48/50PD AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower APPENDIX C - START- UP DATA Table 44 Fan Performance - 48PDD05 Vertical Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 504 0.16 527 0.19 551 0.22 576 0.26 600 0.30 626 0.35 651 0.40 677 0.46 703 0.52 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 613 0.23 710 0.31 798 0.40 632 0.27 725 0.35 810 0.44 652 0.31 741 0.40 823 0.49 673 0.35 759 0.44 838 0.54 694 0.40 777 0.50 854 0.60 716 0.45 797 0.55 871 0.66 739 0.51 817 0.62 889 0.73 762 0.57 838 0.69 908 0.80 785 0.64 859 0.76 927 0.88 1.2 Rpm Bhp 957 0.59 964 0.64 973 0.70 983 0.76 994 0.82 1007 0.89 1021 0.97 1037 1.05 1053 1.14 Rpm 1030 1035 1042 1050 1060 1071 1083 1097 1111 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 0.70 1098 0.80 1163 0.75 1102 0.86 1166 0.81 1107 0.92 1170 0.87 1114 0.99 1176 0.94 1122 1.06 1183 1.02 1132 1.14 1191 1.10 1143 1.23 1200 1.18 1155 1.32 1211 1.27 1168 1.41 1223 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 0.91 0.98 1.04 1.12 1.19 1.27 1.36 1.45 1.55 Table 45 Fan Performance - 48PDE05 Vertical Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 509 0.16 533 0.19 557 0.23 582 0.27 608 0.31 634 0.36 660 0.41 686 0.47 713 0.54 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 618 0.24 714 0.32 802 0.41 637 0.27 730 0.36 814 0.45 658 0.31 746 0.40 828 0.50 679 0.36 764 0.45 843 0.55 701 0.40 783 0.50 860 0.61 723 0.46 803 0.56 877 0.67 747 0.52 824 0.63 896 0.74 770 0.58 846 0.70 915 0.82 795 0.66 868 0.78 935 0.90 1.2 Rpm Bhp 961 0.60 968 0.65 977 0.70 987 0.77 999 0.83 1013 0.90 1027 0.98 1043 1.06 1060 1.16 Rpm 1033 1039 1046 1054 1065 1076 1089 1103 1118 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 0.70 1101 0.81 1166 0.76 1106 0.87 1169 0.82 1111 0.93 1174 0.88 1118 1.00 1180 0.95 1127 1.07 1187 1.03 1137 1.15 1196 1.11 1148 1.24 1206 1.20 1161 1.33 1217 1.29 1175 1.43 1229 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 0.92 0.98 1.05 1.12 1.20 1.28 1.37 1.47 1.57 1.0 Rpm Bhp 881 0.49 890 0.54 900 0.59 912 0.65 926 0.71 941 0.78 957 0.85 974 0.93 992 1.01 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1225 1.03 1227 1.10 1231 1.17 1235 1.24 1241 1.32 1248 1.41 1256 1.50 1266 1.60 1276 1.70 1.0 Rpm Bhp 884 0.50 894 0.55 905 0.60 917 0.66 931 0.72 947 0.79 963 0.86 981 0.94 999 1.02 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1228 1.03 1230 1.10 1234 1.17 1239 1.25 1245 1.33 1253 1.42 1261 1.51 1271 1.61 1282 1.72 92 48/50PD AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower Table 46 Fan Performance - 48PDF05 Vertical Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 520 0.17 545 0.20 570 0.24 596 0.28 623 0.32 650 0.37 677 0.43 705 0.50 734 0.57 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 628 0.24 723 0.33 811 0.41 648 0.28 739 0.37 823 0.46 668 0.32 756 0.41 837 0.51 691 0.37 775 0.46 853 0.56 714 0.42 795 0.52 870 0.62 737 0.48 816 0.58 889 0.69 762 0.54 838 0.65 909 0.76 787 0.61 861 0.72 929 0.84 813 0.68 884 0.80 951 0.93 1.2 Rpm Bhp 968 0.61 976 0.66 985 0.72 996 0.78 1009 0.85 1024 0.92 1039 1.00 1056 1.09 1074 1.19 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 1040 0.71 1108 0.82 1172 0.93 1046 0.77 1112 0.88 1176 1.00 1054 0.83 1119 0.95 1181 1.07 1063 0.90 1127 1.02 1188 1.14 1074 0.97 1136 1.09 1196 1.22 1087 1.05 1147 1.17 1205 1.31 1100 1.13 1159 1.26 1216 1.40 1116 1.22 1173 1.36 1229 1.50 1132 1.32 1188 1.46 1242 1.61 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Table 47 Fan Performance - 48PDD06 Vertical Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 593 0.27 620 0.32 646 0.37 673 0.43 700 0.49 728 0.56 755 0.63 783 0.71 811 0.80 840 0.90 868 1.00 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 688 0.37 773 0.46 851 0.56 711 0.42 793 0.52 868 0.62 734 0.47 813 0.58 886 0.69 758 0.53 835 0.64 905 0.76 783 0.60 857 0.72 925 0.84 807 0.68 879 0.80 946 0.92 833 0.76 903 0.88 968 1.01 858 0.84 926 0.97 990 1.11 884 0.94 950 1.07 1012 1.21 910 1.04 975 1.18 1035 1.33 937 1.15 1000 1.30 1059 1.45 1.2 Rpm Bhp 995 0.78 1007 0.85 1021 0.92 1036 1.00 1053 1.08 1070 1.18 1088 1.28 1107 1.38 1127 1.50 1147 1.62 1168 1.75 Rpm 1061 1072 1084 1098 1112 1128 1145 1162 1181 1200 1220 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 0.89 1125 1.01 1186 0.96 1134 1.09 1194 1.04 1145 1.17 1203 1.13 1157 1.26 1214 1.22 1170 1.35 1226 1.31 1184 1.45 1238 1.42 1199 1.56 1253 1.53 1216 1.68 1268 1.65 1233 1.80 1284 1.77 1251 1.93 1300 1.91 1270 2.07 1318 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 1.14 1.22 1.30 1.39 1.49 1.60 1.71 1.83 1.95 2.09 2.23 1.0 Rpm Bhp 892 0.51 902 0.56 913 0.61 927 0.67 942 0.73 958 0.80 976 0.88 994 0.97 1014 1.06 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1233 1.04 1237 1.11 1241 1.19 1247 1.27 1254 1.35 1262 1.44 1272 1.54 1283 1.64 1295 1.75 1.0 Rpm Bhp 925 0.67 939 0.73 955 0.80 972 0.88 990 0.96 1009 1.05 1029 1.14 1050 1.24 1071 1.35 1092 1.47 1115 1.60 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1245 1.26 1252 1.35 1260 1.44 1269 1.53 1280 1.63 1291 1.74 1304 1.86 1318 1.98 1333 2.11 1349 2.25 1365 2.40 93 48/50PD AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (CFM) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower Table 48 Fan Performance - 48PDE06 Vertical Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 607 0.29 634 0.33 662 0.39 690 0.45 719 0.51 748 0.59 777 0.67 807 0.75 837 0.85 867 0.95 897 1.06 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 700 0.38 784 0.47 861 0.57 724 0.43 804 0.53 879 0.64 748 0.49 826 0.60 898 0.71 773 0.55 848 0.67 918 0.78 799 0.63 872 0.74 940 0.86 825 0.70 896 0.83 962 0.95 852 0.79 920 0.92 985 1.05 879 0.88 946 1.01 1008 1.15 907 0.98 971 1.12 1032 1.26 935 1.09 998 1.24 1057 1.38 963 1.21 1024 1.36 1082 1.51 1.2 Rpm Bhp 1004 0.79 1017 0.86 1032 0.94 1048 1.02 1066 1.11 1084 1.21 1104 1.31 1124 1.43 1145 1.55 1167 1.68 1189 1.82 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 1070 0.91 1133 1.03 1194 1.15 1081 0.98 1143 1.11 1203 1.24 1094 1.06 1155 1.19 1213 1.32 1109 1.15 1168 1.28 1224 1.42 1125 1.24 1182 1.38 1237 1.52 1142 1.35 1197 1.49 1251 1.63 1160 1.45 1214 1.60 1267 1.75 1179 1.57 1231 1.72 1283 1.87 1198 1.70 1250 1.85 1300 2.01 1219 1.83 1269 1.99 1318 2.15 1240 1.97 1290 2.14 1337 2.30 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Table 49 Fan Performance - 48PDF06 Vertical Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 620 0.30 648 0.35 677 0.40 707 0.47 737 0.54 767 0.61 798 0.70 829 0.79 861 0.89 893 1.00 925 1.12 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 711 0.39 794 0.49 871 0.59 736 0.45 816 0.55 890 0.65 762 0.51 838 0.61 910 0.72 788 0.58 862 0.69 931 0.80 815 0.65 887 0.77 954 0.89 843 0.73 912 0.85 977 0.98 871 0.82 938 0.95 1001 1.08 900 0.92 965 1.05 1026 1.19 929 1.03 992 1.17 1052 1.31 959 1.15 1020 1.29 1078 1.43 989 1.27 1048 1.42 1105 1.57 1.2 Rpm Bhp 1013 0.81 1027 0.88 1043 0.96 1060 1.05 1078 1.14 1098 1.24 1119 1.35 1140 1.47 1163 1.60 1186 1.73 1210 1.88 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 1078 0.92 1141 1.05 1202 1.17 1091 1.00 1152 1.13 1211 1.25 1105 1.08 1165 1.21 1222 1.35 1120 1.18 1179 1.31 1235 1.44 1137 1.27 1194 1.41 1249 1.55 1155 1.38 1210 1.52 1264 1.67 1174 1.49 1228 1.64 1280 1.79 1195 1.62 1247 1.77 1298 1.92 1216 1.75 1267 1.90 1317 2.06 1238 1.89 1288 2.05 1336 2.21 1261 2.04 1309 2.20 1357 2.37 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. 1.0 Rpm Bhp 934 0.68 950 0.75 967 0.82 985 0.90 1004 0.98 1024 1.08 1045 1.18 1067 1.29 1090 1.40 1113 1.53 1137 1.66 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1253 1.28 1260 1.37 1269 1.46 1279 1.56 1291 1.66 1304 1.78 1318 1.90 1333 2.03 1349 2.17 1366 2.31 -- -- 1.0 Rpm Bhp 944 0.70 960 0.76 978 0.84 997 0.92 1017 1.01 1039 1.11 1061 1.21 1084 1.33 1108 1.45 1133 1.58 1158 1.72 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1260 1.30 1269 1.39 1278 1.48 1290 1.59 1302 1.70 1316 1.81 1331 1.94 1348 2.08 1365 2.22 1384 2.37 -- -- 94 48/50PD AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 Table 50 Fan Performance - 48PDD05 Horizontal Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 436 0.12 456 0.14 477 0.17 500 0.20 523 0.24 548 0.28 573 0.32 600 0.37 627 0.43 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 559 0.19 661 0.27 753 0.35 574 0.22 673 0.30 762 0.39 592 0.25 687 0.34 774 0.43 611 0.29 703 0.38 787 0.48 631 0.33 721 0.43 801 0.53 652 0.38 739 0.48 818 0.58 674 0.43 759 0.54 835 0.64 697 0.48 779 0.60 854 0.71 720 0.55 801 0.67 873 0.79 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 1.2 Rpm 918 922 929 937 947 959 973 988 1004 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower __ High--Range Motor/Drive Required Bhp 0.54 0.58 0.63 0.69 0.74 0.81 0.88 0.95 1.04 Rpm 993 995 1000 1006 1015 1025 1037 1050 1065 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 0.64 1063 0.75 1130 0.69 1064 0.80 1130 0.74 1067 0.85 1132 0.80 1072 0.91 1136 0.86 1079 0.98 1141 0.93 1088 1.05 1148 1.00 1098 1.13 1157 1.08 1110 1.21 1168 1.17 1123 1.30 1179 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 0.86 0.91 0.97 1.03 1.10 1.18 1.26 1.35 1.44 Table 51 Fan Performance -- 48PDE05 Horizontal Units AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 0.2 Rpm Bhp 443 0.12 463 0.15 485 0.17 508 0.21 532 0.24 558 0.28 584 0.33 611 0.38 639 0.44 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 564 0.20 666 0.27 758 0.36 580 0.22 678 0.31 767 0.40 598 0.26 693 0.34 778 0.44 617 0.30 709 0.39 792 0.48 638 0.34 727 0.43 807 0.54 660 0.39 746 0.49 824 0.59 682 0.44 766 0.55 842 0.66 706 0.50 788 0.61 861 0.72 731 0.56 810 0.68 882 0.80 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 1.2 Rpm 922 926 933 942 952 965 979 995 1012 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower __ High--Range Motor/Drive Required Bhp 0.55 0.59 0.64 0.69 0.75 0.82 0.89 0.97 1.05 Rpm 996 999 1004 1011 1020 1030 1043 1057 1072 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 0.65 1066 0.75 1133 0.69 1068 0.80 1133 0.75 1071 0.86 1136 0.80 1077 0.92 1140 0.87 1084 0.99 1146 0.94 1093 1.06 1153 1.01 1104 1.14 1163 1.09 1116 1.22 1174 1.18 1130 1.32 1186 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 0.86 0.92 0.98 1.04 1.11 1.19 1.27 1.36 1.46 1.0 Rpm Bhp 839 0.45 845 0.49 853 0.53 864 0.58 877 0.63 891 0.69 906 0.76 923 0.83 941 0.91 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1193 0.97 1193 1.03 1194 1.09 1196 1.16 1201 1.23 1207 1.31 1214 1.39 1223 1.48 1234 1.58 1.0 Rpm Bhp 842 0.45 849 0.49 858 0.54 869 0.59 882 0.64 896 0.70 912 0.77 930 0.84 948 0.92 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1196 0.97 1196 1.03 1197 1.10 1200 1.17 1205 1.24 1211 1.32 1220 1.41 1229 1.50 1240 1.60 95 48/50PD AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 Table 52 Fan Performance - 48PDF05 Horizontal Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 456 0.13 477 0.16 500 0.18 524 0.22 550 0.26 576 0.30 604 0.35 633 0.41 662 0.47 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 574 0.20 675 0.28 766 0.37 591 0.23 688 0.32 776 0.41 610 0.27 703 0.36 788 0.45 630 0.31 720 0.40 802 0.50 652 0.35 739 0.45 819 0.55 675 0.40 759 0.50 836 0.61 699 0.46 781 0.57 856 0.68 724 0.52 804 0.63 876 0.75 750 0.59 828 0.71 898 0.83 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 1.2 Rpm 929 934 941 951 963 976 991 1008 1026 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower High Range Motor/Drive Required Bhp 0.56 0.60 0.65 0.71 0.77 0.84 0.91 0.99 1.08 Rpm 1003 1006 1012 1020 1029 1041 1054 1070 1086 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 0.66 1073 0.76 1139 0.71 1075 0.82 1140 0.76 1079 0.87 1143 0.82 1085 0.94 1148 0.89 1093 1.01 1155 0.96 1103 1.08 1163 1.04 1115 1.16 1174 1.12 1129 1.25 1186 1.21 1144 1.35 1199 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 0.87 0.93 0.99 1.06 1.13 1.21 1.30 1.39 1.49 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower Table 53 Fan Performance - 48PDD06 Horizontal Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 521 0.22 546 0.25 572 0.30 599 0.35 627 0.40 655 0.46 684 0.53 714 0.61 744 0.69 775 0.78 806 0.88 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 628 0.31 718 0.40 800 0.49 649 0.35 737 0.45 816 0.55 671 0.40 757 0.50 834 0.61 695 0.45 777 0.56 852 0.67 719 0.51 799 0.63 872 0.74 745 0.58 822 0.70 893 0.82 771 0.66 846 0.78 915 0.91 797 0.74 871 0.87 938 1.00 824 0.83 896 0.96 961 1.10 852 0.92 922 1.06 985 1.21 880 1.03 948 1.18 1010 1.32 1.2 Rpm Bhp 949 0.70 961 0.77 974 0.83 988 0.91 1004 0.99 1022 1.07 1040 1.17 1060 1.27 1081 1.38 1102 1.50 1124 1.62 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 1018 0.82 1083 0.93 1146 1.05 1027 0.88 1091 1.00 1153 1.13 1039 0.95 1101 1.08 1161 1.21 1052 1.03 1112 1.16 1171 1.29 1066 1.11 1125 1.25 1182 1.38 1082 1.20 1139 1.34 1195 1.48 1099 1.30 1155 1.44 1209 1.59 1117 1.41 1172 1.55 1225 1.70 1136 1.52 1190 1.67 1242 1.82 1156 1.65 1209 1.80 1259 1.96 1177 1.78 1228 1.94 1278 2.10 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. 1.0 Rpm Bhp 850 0.46 857 0.50 867 0.55 879 0.60 893 0.66 908 0.72 925 0.79 944 0.87 964 0.95 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1202 0.98 1202 1.05 1204 1.11 1208 1.18 1214 1.26 1221 1.34 1230 1.43 1241 1.53 1253 1.63 1.0 Rpm Bhp 877 0.60 890 0.65 906 0.72 922 0.79 940 0.86 959 0.94 979 1.03 1001 1.13 1022 1.24 1045 1.35 1069 1.47 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1207 1.18 1212 1.26 1219 1.34 1227 1.43 1238 1.52 1249 1.62 1262 1.73 1277 1.85 1292 1.98 1309 2.12 1326 2.26 96 48/50PD AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 Table 54 Fan Performance - 48PDE06 Horizontal Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 536 0.23 563 0.27 590 0.31 619 0.37 648 0.43 678 0.49 709 0.56 740 0.65 772 0.73 804 0.83 837 0.94 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 640 0.32 729 0.41 811 0.51 663 0.36 749 0.46 828 0.56 686 0.42 770 0.52 846 0.62 711 0.47 792 0.58 866 0.69 737 0.54 816 0.65 887 0.77 764 0.61 840 0.73 909 0.85 792 0.69 865 0.81 933 0.94 820 0.78 891 0.91 957 1.04 849 0.87 918 1.01 982 1.14 879 0.97 946 1.12 1008 1.26 909 1.09 974 1.24 1034 1.38 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower 1.2 Rpm 958 971 985 1001 1018 1036 1056 1077 1099 1122 1146 Bhp 0.72 0.78 0.85 0.93 1.01 1.10 1.20 1.31 1.43 1.55 1.69 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 1027 0.83 1092 0.95 1154 1.07 1037 0.90 1101 1.02 1162 1.15 1049 0.97 1111 1.10 1171 1.23 1063 1.05 1124 1.18 1182 1.32 1079 1.14 1138 1.27 1194 1.41 1096 1.24 1153 1.37 1208 1.51 1114 1.34 1170 1.48 1224 1.63 1134 1.45 1188 1.60 1241 1.75 1154 1.57 1207 1.72 1259 1.88 1176 1.70 1228 1.86 1278 2.02 1198 1.84 1249 2.00 1298 2.16 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 Table 55 Fan Performance - 48PDF06 Horizontal Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 551 0.24 579 0.28 608 0.33 638 0.39 668 0.45 700 0.52 732 0.60 765 0.68 799 0.78 833 0.88 867 1.00 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 653 0.33 741 0.42 821 0.52 676 0.38 761 0.48 839 0.58 701 0.43 783 0.54 858 0.64 727 0.49 807 0.60 879 0.71 755 0.56 831 0.68 902 0.79 783 0.64 857 0.76 925 0.88 812 0.72 884 0.85 950 0.97 842 0.81 912 0.95 976 1.08 873 0.92 940 1.05 1002 1.19 904 1.03 969 1.17 1030 1.31 936 1.15 999 1.30 1058 1.44 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower 1.2 Rpm 968 981 996 1013 1031 1051 1072 1094 1118 1142 1168 Bhp 0.73 0.80 0.87 0.95 1.04 1.14 1.24 1.35 1.48 1.61 1.75 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 1035 0.85 1100 0.97 1162 1.09 1047 0.92 1110 1.04 1171 1.16 1060 0.99 1121 1.12 1181 1.25 1075 1.08 1135 1.21 1193 1.34 1092 1.17 1150 1.30 1206 1.44 1110 1.27 1166 1.41 1221 1.55 1129 1.38 1185 1.52 1238 1.67 1150 1.50 1204 1.64 1256 1.79 1172 1.62 1225 1.77 1275 1.93 1195 1.76 1246 1.92 1296 2.07 1219 1.91 1269 2.07 1317 2.23 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. 1.0 Rpm Bhp 887 0.61 901 0.67 917 0.74 935 0.81 954 0.89 975 0.98 996 1.07 1019 1.17 1042 1.28 1066 1.40 1092 1.53 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1214 1.20 1221 1.28 1228 1.36 1238 1.45 1249 1.55 1262 1.66 1276 1.78 1292 1.90 1309 2.03 1327 2.18 1346 2.33 1.0 Rpm Bhp 896 0.62 912 0.69 929 0.76 948 0.83 968 0.91 990 1.01 1013 1.11 1037 1.21 1062 1.33 1087 1.46 1114 1.60 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1222 1.21 1229 1.29 1238 1.38 1248 1.48 1261 1.58 1275 1.69 1290 1.82 1307 1.95 1325 2.09 1344 2.24 1365 2.40 97 48/50PD AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 0.2 Rpm Bhp 492 0.15 513 0.18 534 0.21 557 0.24 580 0.28 603 0.33 627 0.38 651 0.43 675 0.49 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 1.2 Rpm 950 955 962 971 981 993 1005 1019 1034 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower Bhp 0.58 0.63 0.68 0.74 0.80 0.87 0.94 1.02 1.10 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 0.2 Rpm Bhp 568 0.25 592 0.29 616 0.34 641 0.39 665 0.45 690 0.51 716 0.57 742 0.65 768 0.73 794 0.81 820 0.91 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower 1.2 Rpm 978 989 1001 1015 1029 1045 1061 1078 1096 1115 1134 Bhp 0.75 0.81 0.88 0.96 1.04 1.12 1.21 1.31 1.42 1.53 1.65 Table 56 Fan Performance - 50PD05 Vertical Units AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 604 0.22 701 0.31 790 0.39 620 0.26 714 0.34 800 0.43 638 0.29 729 0.38 812 0.48 657 0.33 745 0.43 825 0.53 677 0.38 762 0.48 839 0.58 697 0.43 779 0.53 855 0.64 718 0.48 798 0.59 871 0.70 739 0.54 817 0.65 889 0.77 761 0.61 837 0.72 907 0.85 Rpm 1023 1027 1032 1039 1047 1057 1068 1080 1094 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 0.69 1092 0.79 1157 0.74 1094 0.85 1158 0.79 1098 0.91 1161 0.85 1103 0.97 1165 0.92 1110 1.04 1171 0.99 1118 1.11 1178 1.06 1128 1.19 1186 1.14 1139 1.28 1196 1.23 1151 1.37 1206 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 0.90 0.96 1.03 1.09 1.17 1.24 1.33 1.41 1.51 Table 57 Fan Performance -- 50PD06 Vertical Units AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 667 0.34 753 0.44 833 0.54 687 0.39 771 0.49 848 0.59 708 0.44 789 0.54 864 0.65 730 0.50 809 0.61 881 0.72 752 0.56 829 0.67 900 0.79 775 0.63 850 0.75 918 0.87 798 0.70 871 0.82 938 0.95 821 0.78 892 0.91 958 1.04 845 0.86 915 1.00 979 1.14 869 0.96 937 1.10 1000 1.24 894 1.05 960 1.20 1021 1.35 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 1046 0.87 1110 0.98 1172 1.11 1055 0.93 1117 1.05 1178 1.18 1065 1.00 1126 1.13 1185 1.26 1077 1.08 1136 1.21 1194 1.35 1090 1.16 1148 1.30 1204 1.44 1104 1.26 1161 1.39 1216 1.53 1119 1.35 1174 1.49 1228 1.64 1135 1.45 1189 1.60 1241 1.75 1151 1.57 1204 1.71 1256 1.87 1169 1.68 1221 1.84 1271 1.99 1187 1.81 1238 1.97 1287 2.13 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. 1.0 Rpm Bhp 873 0.49 880 0.53 889 0.58 900 0.63 912 0.69 926 0.75 940 0.82 956 0.89 972 0.97 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1219 1.02 1220 1.08 1222 1.15 1225 1.22 1229 1.30 1235 1.38 1242 1.46 1251 1.56 1260 1.65 1.0 Rpm Bhp 908 0.64 920 0.70 934 0.76 950 0.83 966 0.91 983 0.99 1001 1.08 1020 1.18 1039 1.28 1059 1.38 1079 1.50 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1231 1.23 1236 1.31 1242 1.39 1250 1.48 1259 1.58 1269 1.68 1280 1.79 1293 1.90 1306 2.02 1320 2.15 1335 2.29 98 48/50PD AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 Table 58 Fan Performance - 50PD05 Horizontal Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 422 0.11 439 0.13 457 0.16 477 0.19 498 0.22 521 0.25 545 0.29 569 0.34 595 0.39 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 548 0.19 652 0.26 745 0.35 561 0.21 662 0.29 752 0.38 577 0.24 674 0.33 761 0.42 593 0.27 688 0.37 773 0.46 611 0.31 704 0.41 786 0.51 630 0.35 720 0.46 801 0.56 650 0.40 738 0.51 817 0.62 672 0.45 757 0.57 834 0.68 694 0.51 777 0.63 852 0.75 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 1.2 Rpm 911 913 918 925 934 944 956 970 985 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower __ High Range Motor/Drive Required Bhp 0.53 0.57 0.62 0.67 0.72 0.78 0.85 0.92 1.00 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 986 0.63 1056 0.74 1123 986 0.68 1056 0.78 1122 989 0.72 1058 0.84 1123 995 0.78 1061 0.89 1125 1002 0.84 1067 0.95 1129 1010 0.90 1074 1.02 1135 1021 0.97 1083 1.09 1143 1033 1.04 1094 1.17 1152 1047 1.13 1106 1.26 1162 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.01 1.08 1.15 1.23 1.31 1.40 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 Table 59 Fan Performance -- 50PD06 Horizontal Units 0.2 Rpm Bhp 491 0.19 513 0.23 537 0.27 561 0.31 586 0.36 613 0.41 640 0.47 667 0.54 695 0.61 724 0.69 753 0.78 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 0.4 0.6 0.8 Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 604 0.28 697 0.37 781 0.47 623 0.32 714 0.42 795 0.52 643 0.37 731 0.47 810 0.57 664 0.42 750 0.52 827 0.63 686 0.47 770 0.58 845 0.70 709 0.53 790 0.65 864 0.77 732 0.60 812 0.72 884 0.85 757 0.67 834 0.80 904 0.93 782 0.75 857 0.89 926 1.02 807 0.84 881 0.98 948 1.12 833 0.93 905 1.08 971 1.23 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 1.2 Rpm 932 942 953 966 980 996 1012 1030 1049 1068 1089 LEGEND Bhp -- Brake Horsepower Low Range Motor/Drive Required Bhp 0.68 0.73 0.80 0.86 0.94 1.02 1.11 1.20 1.30 1.41 1.53 Rpm 1002 1009 1019 1030 1043 1057 1072 1088 1106 1124 1143 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 0.79 1068 0.91 1132 0.85 1074 0.97 1136 0.91 1082 1.04 1143 0.99 1092 1.11 1151 1.06 1103 1.19 1161 1.15 1115 1.28 1172 1.24 1129 1.38 1184 1.34 1144 1.48 1198 1.44 1160 1.59 1213 1.56 1178 1.71 1229 1.68 1196 1.84 1246 NOTES: 1. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp 1.03 1.09 1.17 1.24 1.33 1.42 1.52 1.63 1.74 1.86 1.99 1.0 Rpm Bhp 831 0.44 835 0.47 842 0.51 851 0.56 862 0.61 875 0.67 889 0.73 904 0.80 921 0.87 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1187 0.96 1185 1.01 1185 1.07 1186 1.14 1189 1.21 1194 1.28 1200 1.36 1208 1.45 1217 1.54 1.0 Rpm Bhp 859 0.57 871 0.62 884 0.68 899 0.75 915 0.82 932 0.89 950 0.97 969 1.06 989 1.16 1010 1.26 1032 1.38 2.0 Rpm Bhp 1192 1.15 1196 1.22 1201 1.30 1208 1.38 1217 1.47 1227 1.56 1238 1.67 1251 1.78 1265 1.89 1279 2.02 1295 2.16 99 GENERAL NOTES FOR FAN PERFORMANCE DATA TABLES 1. Static pressure losses from accessories and options 4. Extensive motor and drive testing on these units ensures (economizer, etc.) must be added to external static pressure that the full horsepower range of the motor can be utilized before entering Fan Performance table. Refer to with confidence. Using the fan motors up to the bhp rating Accessory/FIOP Static Pressure information. shown will not result in nuisance tripping or premature 2. Interpolation is permissible. Do not extrapolate. motor failure. Unit warranty will not be affected. 3. Fan performance tables are based on wet coils, clean filters, and casing losses. Gas heat losses are included for 48 series units. 5. Use of a field-supplied motor may affect wire size. Recalculate the unit power supply MCA and MOCP if required. Contact your Carrier representative for details. 6. Use the following formula to calculate input watts: Input Watts = Bhp x (746/Motor Eff) 48/50PD 100 48/50PD APPENDIX D - ADDITIONAL START- UP DATA Table 60 Air Quantity Limits (50PD Units) UNIT 50PD 05 06 COOLING (cfm) 1200 1500 2000 2500 HEATING (cfm) OPTIONAL ELECTRIC HEAT 1200 1500 2000 2500 Table 61 Air Quantity Limits (48PD Units) UNIT 48PD 05 (Low Heat) 05 (Med Heat) 05 (High Heat) 06 (Low Heat) 06 (Med Heat) 06 (High Heat) COOLING (cfm) Min Max 1200 2000 1200 1200 2000 2000 1500 2500 1500 2500 1500 2500 HEATING (cfm) Min Max 600 1680 940 2810 1130 2820 940 2810 1130 2820 1510 2520 Table 62 Evaporator Fan Motor Specifications - 48/50PD 48/50PD DRIVE VOLTAGE/PHASE 05 & 06 Low & High 208/230--- 3ph 460--- 3ph NOTES: 1. Extensive motor and electrical testing ensures that the motors can be utilized with confidence up to the maximum applied bhp, watts, and amps. Using the fan motor up to the maximum ratings shown will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motor failure. Unit warranty will not be affected. 2. Convert bhp to watts using the following formula: watts = bhp (746) motor efficiency EFFICIENCY MAX BHP MAX AMPS 0.80 2.0 6.4 0.80 2.0 3.2 3. The EPACT (Energy Policy Act of 1992) regulates energy requirements for specific types of indoor-fan motors. Motors regulated by EPACT include any general purpose, T-frame (three-digit, 143 and larger), single-speed, foot mounted, polyphase, squirrel cage induction motors of NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) design A and B, manufactured for use in the United States. Ranging from 1 to 200 Hp, these continuous-duty motors operate on 230 and 460 volt, 60 Hz power. If a motor does not fit into these specifications, the motor does not have to be replaced by an EPACT-compliant energy-efficient motor. Variable-speed motors are exempt from EPACT compliance requirements. Therefore, the indoor-fan motors for Carrier 48/50PG03--14 units are exempt from these requirements. Table 63 Fan Rpm at Motor Pulley Settings* - 48/50PD UNIT 48/50PD DRIVE 0 1/2 MOTOR PULLEY TURNS OPEN 1 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 41/2 5 05 Low 910 878 847 815 784 753 721 690 659 627 596 High 1173 1139 1104 1070 1035 1001 966 932 897 863 828 06 Low 978 949 920 891 863 834 805 776 748 719 690 High 1261 1227 1194 1161 1128 1095 1062 1028 995 962 929 *Approximate fan rpm shown, based on 1725 rpm motor. NOTE: Factory speed setting is at 5 turns open. AIRFLOW (CFM) 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 Table 64 Accessory/FIOP Pressure Drop (in. wg) - 48/50PD ELECTRIC HEAT 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.11 0.13 0.15 ECONOMIZER (Vertical) 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 ECONOMIZER (Horizontal) 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.10 0.14 0.17 0.22 0.26 0.31 0.37 0.43 0.49 0.56 101 48/50PD CONTROL SET POINT AND CONFIGURATION LOG Model Number: _____________________________ Software Versions: ___________________________ Serial Number: ______________________________ MBB: CESR131320---- _ _ Date: ______________________________________ ECB: CESR131249---- _ _ Technician: _________________________________ MARQ: CESR131171---- _ _ INDICATE UNIT SETTINGS BELOW Control Type: Thermostat/T55 Space Temp./T--56 Space Temp./T--58 Space Temp. Set Points: Cooling Occupied: _______________ Unoccupied: __________________ Heating Occupied: _______________ Unoccupied: __________________ ITEM CONFIGURATION DISP METR LANG PROT PSWD TEST UNIT S.DLY OC.FN IDF.F FS.MX FS.MN FS.VM FN.SW FL.SW FS.SW RM.SW RH.S RH.SW TCS.C TCS.H COOL MIN.C FS.CD MRT.C MOT.C RST.C FOD.C CS.A1 C.LO ALM.N SAT SASP SA.MU SA.MD SST SST.O SST.1 SST.2 SST.3 PSI.D OFC 1.MXP 2.MNP 2.ON 2.OFF EXPANSION Table 65 MODE - CONFIGURATION RANGE UNITS DEFAULT Display Configuration Metric Display Language Selection Password Enable Service Password Test Display LEDs Unit Configuration Startup Delay Fan On When Occupied Shut Down on IDF Failure Supply Fan Maximum Speed Supply Fan Minimum Speed Vent Mode Fan Speed Fan Status Switch Filter Status Switch Fire Shutdown Switch Remote Occupancy Switch RH Sensor on OAQ Input Space Humidity Switch Temp Cmp Strt Cool Factr Temp Cmp Strt Heat Factr Cooling Configuration Min Compressor Capacity Fan Speed Control Demand Compressor Min On Time Compressor Min Off Time Runtime to Reset Strikes Fan--- off Delay, Mech Cool Current Sensing A1 On/Off 0=English 1=Spanish 2=French 3=Portuguese Enable/Disable 0000 to 9999 On/Off 0 to 600 Yes/No Yes/No 80 to 100 10 to 70 10 to 100 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed Yes/No 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed 0 to 60 0 to 60 15 to 80 1 to 9.9 120 to 999 300 to 999 120 to 999 0 to 600 Enable/Disable sec % % % mins mins % ^F sec sec sec sec Compressor Lockout Temp 0 to 100F dF Alert Each Strike Yes//No Supply Air Temperature Cool Supply Air Setpoint 45 to 75 dF SASP Maximum Reset Up 0 to 20 ^F SASP Maximum Reset --- 20 to 0 ^F Down Low Suction Control Suction OK Temperature 10 to 50 dF Low Suction --- Level 1 10 to 50 dF Low Suction --- Level 2 5 to 50 dF Low Suction --- Level 3 0 to 50 dF Ckt A Minimum Pressure 0 to 500 psig Outdoor Fan Control Fan Lev1 Max Pressure 100 to 500 psig Fan Lev2 Min Pressure 100 to 500 psig Fan Lev2 On Temperature 0 to 100 F Fan Lev2 Off Temperature 0 to 100 F Off 0 Disable 1111 Off 30 Yes Yes 100 70 50 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP 0 No 0 0 0 70 3 180 300 300 60 Disable: reserved for future use DO NOT ENABLE 0 Yes 65 10 --- 10 18 20 15 10 20 450 200 55 45 CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE SERVICE CONFIGURATION DISPLAY CCN POINT DISPUNIT LANGUAGE (display only, not in table) UNIT PASS_EBL PASSWORD DISPTEST STARTDLY OCC_FAN FATALFAN SPEEDMAX SPEEDMIN SPEEDVNT FANSTCFG FILSTCFG SHTDNCFG REMOCCFG RH_OAQ HUMSTCFG COOL_CFG TCSTCOOL TCSTHEAT MIN_CAPC SPEEDDMD MIN_ON MIN_OFF MIN_ON_S COOL_FOD A1_SENSE OATLCOMP ALM_NOW SASP SASPMAXU SASPMAXD SSTOK SSTLEV1 SSTLEV2 SSTLEV3 DELTAP_A LEV1MAXP LEV2MINP LEV2ON LEV2OFF ENTRY 102 48/50PD ITEM HEAT HT.TY N.HTR MRT.H MOT.H H.DEC H.INC FOD.E FOD.G HT.LO SAT SAT.H SAM.L SAM.U SPT HT.PD HT.ND H.LAG ECON EC.EN E.CTL MP.25 MP.50 MP.75 MP.MX EC.MX M.ANG EH.LO EL.LO DF.DB UEFC FC.TM FC.LO PE.EN PE1.C PE2.C IDF.C EN.SW Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont) EXPANSION Heating Configuration Type of Heat Installed RANGE 0=No Heat 1=Gas 2=Electric Number of Heat Stages 1 to 2 Heat Minimum On Time Heat Minimum Off Time Heat Stage Decrease Time Heat Stage Increase Time Fan--- off Delay, Elect Heat Fan--- off Delay, Gas Heat Heating Lockout Temp SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SAT Heat Mode Sensing Maximum SAT Lower Level Maximum SAT Upper Level SPACE TEMPERATURE SPT Heat Demand (+) Level SPT Heat Demand (--- ) Level Heat Thermal Lag Factor Economizer Configuration Economizer Installed 60 to 999 60 to 999 120 to 999 120 to 999 10 to 600 45 to 600 40 to 125F Enable/Disable 85 to 200 85 to 200 0.5 to 5 --- 5 to --- 0.5 0 to 5 Yes/No Economizer Control Type Econ Min at 25% Fanspeed Econ Min at 50% Fanspeed Econ Min at 75% Fanspeed Econ Min at Max Fanspeed Econo Cool Max Position Min Actuator Ctrl Angle Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit Diff Dry Bulb Control Unoccupied Free Cooling Free Cool PreOcc Time Free Cool Low Temp Limit Power Exhaust Installed 1=Dig/Position 2=Dig/Command 3=Analog Ctrl 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 75 to 90 40 to 100F --- 30 to 50F Disable/Enable 0=Disabled 1=Unoccupied 2=Preoccupancy 1 to 9999 --- 30 to 70F Yes/No Power Exhaust Stage1 CFM Power Exhaust Stage2 CFM Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM Enthalpy Switch 100 to 15000 100 to 15000 500 to 15000 0=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed UNITS sec sec sec DEFAULT 0 (50 series with no electric heat) 1 (48 series) 2 (50 series with electric heat) 1 (50 series <15kW) 2 (48 series, 50 series >=15kW) 120 120 300 CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE HEAT_CFG CCN POINT HEATTYPE NUM_HEAT HMIN_ON HMIN_OFF HSTAGDEC sec 450 sec 30 sec 45 dF 75 HSTAGINC ELEC_FOD GAS_FOD OATLHEAT Disable dF 140 dF 160 SAT_HEAT SATMAX_L SATMAX_H ^F 1 ^F --- 1 min 1 No: no FIOP Yes: FIOP 1 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 30 % 100 88 dF 65 dF 0 Enable 2 min 120 dF 50 No: no FIOP Yes: FIOP cfm 600 cfm 0 cfm 1600 (05) 2000 (06) 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP ECON_CFG HDEM_POS HDEM_NEG HEAT_LAG ECONO ECON_CTL MINP_25 MINP_50 MINP_75 MINP_MAX ECONOMAX MINANGLE OATLECLH OATLECLL DIFFBULB UEFC_CFG UEFCTIME OATLUEFC PE_ENABL PE1_CFM PE2_CFM IDF_CFM ENTHLCFG ENTRY 103 48/50PD ITEM AIR.Q IA.CF IA.FN II.CF II.FN AQ.MN OVR.P OA.CF OAQ.L AQD.L AQD.H DF.ON DF.OF I.4M I.20M O.4M O.20M H.4M H.20M ALM.O A.SPC A.SRT A.OAT A.CS A.CMP A.CKT A.SSP A.SCT A.FAN A.FIL A.ECO PID EC.P EC.I EC.D EC.DT E.DBD CP.P CP.I CP.D CP.DT LK.P LK.I LK.D LK.DT Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont) EXPANSION Air Quality Config. IAQ Analog Input Config IAQ Analog Fan Config IAQ Switch Input Config IAQ Switch Fan Config Econo Min IAQ Position IAQ Override Position OAQ Analog Input Config OAQ Lockout Limit AQ Differential Low AQ Differential High Fan On AQ Differential Fan Off AQ Differential IAQ Sensor Value at 4mA IAQ Sensor Value at 20mA OAQ Sensor Value at 4mA OAQ Sensor Value at 20mA RH Sensor Value at 4mA RH Sensor Value at 20mA Alarm Relay Config. SPT/SPRH Sensor Failure SAT/RAT Sensor Failure OAT Thermistor Failure Current Sensor Failure Compressor Failure Refrig Circuit Failure SSP Transducer Failure SCT Thermistor Failure Indoor Fan Failure Dirty Filter Economizer Failure PID Configurations Economizer PID --- kP Economizer PID --- kI Economizer PID --- kD Economizer PID --- rate Economizer PID Deadband Capacity PID --- kP Capacity PID --- kI Capacity PID --- kD Capacity PID --- rate Linkage Staging PID --- kP Linkage Staging PID --- kI Linkage Staging PID --- kD Linkage Staging PID --rate RANGE 0=No IAQ 1=DCV 2=Override IAQ 3=Ctrl Min Pos 0=Never 1=Occupied 2=Always 0=No IAQ 1=DCV N/O 2=DCV N/C 3=Override N/O 4=Override N/C 0=Never 1=Occupied 2=Always 0 to 100 0 to 100 0=No OAQ 1=DCV 2=Lockout OAQ 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 5000 0 to 50 60 to 100 Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 0.0 to 99.9 0.0 to 99.9 0.0 to 99.9 10.0 to 180.0 0 to 25 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 1 to 30 0.0 to 99.9 0.0 to 99.9 0.0 to 99.9 10.0 to 180.0 UNITS DEFAULT 0: no FIOP 1: FIOP 0 0 0 % 10 % 100 0 % % sec % secs secs 600 100 700 600 200 0 2000 0 2000 0 100 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2.5 0.1 1 15 3 1.5 0.1 1 5 10 5 5 30 CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE IAQ_CFG CCN POINT IAQANCFG IAQANFAN IAQINCFG ALM_CFG PID_CFG IAQINFAN IAQMINP IAQOVPOS OAQANCFG OAQLOCK DAQ_LOW DAQ_HIGH DAQFNON DAQFNOFF IAQ_4MA IAQ_20MA OAQ_4MA OAQ_20MA RH_4MA RH_20MA SPACE_AL SATRATAL OAT_AL CS_AL COMP_AL CKT_AL SSP_AL SCT_AL FAN_AL FILT_AL ECON_AL ECONO_P ECONO_I ECONO_D ECONO_DT ECONBAND VCAP_P VCAP_I VCAP_D VCAP_DT LINK_P LINK_I LINK_D LINK_DT ENTRY 104 48/50PD ITEM (GENERIC = CCN only) TRIM SPT.C SPT.T SAT.C SAT.T RAT.C RAT.T CCN CCN.A CCN.B BAUD BROD B.TIM B.OAT B.GS B.ACK SCH.O SCH.N HOL.G OV.TL OV.EX OV.SP LDSH S.GRP R.MXC S.MXC R.MXH S.MXH Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont) EXPANSION POINT 01 Definition RANGE 8--- char ASCII UNITS DEFAULT CCN TABLE/SUB--- TABLE GENERICS CCN POINT Point_01 POINT 02 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_02 POINT 03 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_03 POINT 04 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_04 POINT 05 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_05 POINT 06 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_06 POINT 07 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_07 POINT 08 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_08 POINT 09 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_09 POINT 10 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_10 POINT 11 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_11 POINT 12 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_12 POINT 13 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_13 POINT 14 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_14 POINT 15 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_15 POINT 16 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_16 POINT 17 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_17 POINT 18 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_18 POINT 19 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_19 POINT 20 Definition 8--- char ASCII Point_20 Sensor Calibration Space Temp Calibration Space Temp Trim Supply Air Temp Calib. Supply Air Temp Trim Return Air Temp Calib. Return Air Temp Trim --- 30 to 130 --- 30 to 30 --- 30 to 130 --- 30 to 30 --- 30 to 130 --- 30 to 30 dF ^F 0 dF ^F 0 dF ^F 0 CCN Configuration CCN Element Number 1 to 239 1 CCN Bus Number 0 to 239 0 CCN Baud Rate 2400, 4800, 9600, 3 19200, 38400 CCN Broadcast Config. CCN Time/Date Broadcast Yes/No No CCN OAT Broadcast Yes/No No Global Schedule Broadcst Yes/No No CCN Broadcast Ack'er Yes/No No CCN Schedule Overrides Schedule Number 0 = Always 0 Occupied 1--- 64 = Local Schedule 65--- 99 = Global Schedule Accept Global Holidays Yes/No No Override Time Limit 0 to 4 hours 4 Timed Override Hours 0 to 4 hours 0 SPT Override Enabled Yes/No Yes CCN Schedule Overrides Loadshed Group Number 0 to 16 0 Redline Max Capacity 0 to 100 % 100 Loadshed Max Capacity 0 to 100 % 100 Redline Max Heat Stages 0 to 2 2 Loadshed Max Heat 0 to 2 2 Stages (CCN TRIM --- see Maintenance Display) CONFIGURATION 48_50_PD BRODEFS SCHEDOVR CCNADD CCNBUS CCNBAUDD CCNBC OATBC GSBC CCNBCACK SCHEDNUM LOADSHED HOLIDAYT OTL OVR_EXT TIMEOVER SHED_NUM MAXCREDL MAXCSHED MAXHREDL MAXHSHED ENTRY 105 48/50PD UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST MODEL NO.: SERIAL NO: _____________________________________ DATE: ______________ TECHNICIAN: ___________________________________ I. PRE-START-UP: j VERIFY THAT ALL PACKAGING MATERIALS HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM UNIT j VERIFY INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR AIR HOOD j VERIFY INSTALLATION OF FLUE EXHAUST AND INLET HOOD (48PD ONLY) j VERIFY THAT CONDENSATE CONNECTION IS INSTALLED PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS j VERIFY THAT ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND TERMINALS ARE TIGHT j VERIFY GAS PRESSURE TO UNIT GAS VALVE IS WITHIN SPECIFIED RANGE (48PD ONLY) j CHECK GAS PIPING FOR LEAKS (48PD ONLY) j CHECK THAT INDOOR--AIR FILTERS ARE CLEAN AND IN PLACE j CHECK THAT OUTDOOR AIR INLET SCREENS ARE IN PLACE j VERIFY THAT UNIT IS LEVEL j CHECK FAN WHEELS AND PROPELLER FOR LOCATION IN HOUSING/ORIFICE AND VERIFY SETSCREW IS TIGHT j VERIFY THAT FAN SHEAVES ARE ALIGNED AND BELTS ARE PROPERLY TENSIONED j VERIFY THAT SCROLL COMPRESSORS ARE ROTATING IN THE CORRECT DIRECTION j VERIFY INSTALLATION OF SPACE SENSOR j VERIFY CONFIGURATION VALUES FOR ELECTRONIC CONTROLS (REFER TO CONTROL SET UP CHECKLIST) j VERIFY THAT CRANKCASE HEATERS HAVE BEEN ENERGIZED FOR AT LEAST 24 HOURS j VERIFY THAT THE VFD IS IN AUTO MODE II. START-UP ELECTRICAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE L1- L2 L2- L3 L3- L1 COMPRESSOR AMPS--COMPRESSOR A1 L1 L2 L3 --COMPRESSOR B1 L1 L2 L3 --COMPRESSOR C1 L1 L2 L3 ELECTRIC HEAT AMPS (IF EQUIPPED) L1 L2 L3 SUPPLY FAN AMPS _______ L1 L2 L3 TEMPERATURES OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE RETURN-AIR TEMPERATURE COOLING SUPPLY AIR GAS HEAT SUPPLY AIR (48PG) ELECTRIC HEAT SUPPLY AIR (50PG) PRESSURES F DB (Dry Bulb) F DB F F F F WB (Wet Bulb) GAS INLET PRESSURE GAS MANIFOLD PRESSURE REFRIGERANT SUCTION REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE STAGE NO. 1 CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B IN. WG IN. WG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG STAGE NO. 2 CIRCUIT C PSIG j VERIFY REFRIGERANT CHARGE USING CHARGING CHARTS GENERAL j ECONOMIZER MINIMUM VENT AND CHANGEOVER SETTINGS TO JOB REQUIREMENTS IN. WG 106 Copyright 2009 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231 Printed in U.S.A. Edition Date: 6/09 Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations. 107 Catalog No:48- 50PD- 02T Replaces: 48--50PD--01T 48/50PDAcrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)